US20070078135A1 - Substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists - Google Patents

Substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20070078135A1
US20070078135A1 US11/406,532 US40653206A US2007078135A1 US 20070078135 A1 US20070078135 A1 US 20070078135A1 US 40653206 A US40653206 A US 40653206A US 2007078135 A1 US2007078135 A1 US 2007078135A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
mono
aminocarbonyl
substituted
independently chosen
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/406,532
Inventor
Jun Yuan
Qin Guo
He Zhao
Shaojing Hu
Darren Whitehouse
Wallace Pringle
Jianmin Mao
George Maynard
Jack Hammer
David Wustrow
Hongbin Li
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Neurogen Corp
Original Assignee
Neurogen Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Neurogen Corp filed Critical Neurogen Corp
Priority to US11/406,532 priority Critical patent/US20070078135A1/en
Assigned to NEUROGEN CORPORATION reassignment NEUROGEN CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MAYNARD, GEORGE D., WHITEHOUSE, DARREN L., HAMMER, JACK D., HU, SHAOJING, GUO, QIN, LI, HONGBIN, MAO, JIANMIN, PRINGLE, WALLACE C., WUSTROW, DAVID J., YUAN, JUN, ZHAO, HE
Publication of US20070078135A1 publication Critical patent/US20070078135A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/28—Radicals substituted by singly-bound oxygen or sulphur atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/61—Halogen atoms or nitro radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/72—Nitrogen atoms
    • C07D213/74—Amino or imino radicals substituted by hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/32—One oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom
    • C07D239/42—One nitrogen atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/46—Two or more oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms
    • C07D239/52—Two oxygen atoms
    • C07D239/54—Two oxygen atoms as doubly bound oxygen atoms or as unsubstituted hydroxy radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D241/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D241/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D241/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D241/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D241/20—Nitrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D241/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings
    • C07D241/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D241/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D241/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,4-diazine or hydrogenated 1,4-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D241/24—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to substituted heteroaryl compounds, and to the use of such compounds to treat conditions responsive to cannabinoid receptor-1 (CB1) activation.
  • the invention further relates to the use of such compounds as reagents for the identification of other agents that bind to CB1, and as probes for the detection and localization of CB1.
  • Obesity is the most common nutritional problem in developed countries. This condition is often both harmful and costly, as it increases the likelihood of developing serious health conditions (such as cardiovascular diseases and diabetes) and complicates numerous chronic conditions such as respiratory diseases, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis, gall bladder disease and dyslipidernias. Fortunately, however, many of the conditions caused or exacerbated by obesity can be resolved or dramatically improved by weight loss.
  • obesity is now recognized as a complex multifactorial disease involving defective regulation of food intake, food-induced energy expenditure and the balance between lipid and lean body anabolism. Both environmental and genetic factors play a role in the development of obesity. As a result, treatment programs that focus entirely on behavior modification have limited efficacy and are associated with recidivism rates exceeding 95%. Pharmacotherapy is now seen as a critical component of weight loss and subsequent weight management.
  • the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists that satisfy Formula I: or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester of such a compound.
  • Formula I is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester of such a compound.
  • substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula II are provided: Within Formula II:
  • substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula III are provided: Within Formula III:
  • substituted heteroaryl CB 1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula IV are provided: Within Formula IV:
  • the present invention further provides, within other aspects, substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula V: Within Formula V:
  • the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula VI: Within Formula VI:
  • the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula VII: Within Formula VII:
  • substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I, and other Formulas provided herein exhibit a K i of no greater than 2 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar in a CB1 ligand binding assay and/or have an IC 50 value of no greater than 2 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar in an assay for determination of CB1 antagonist activity.
  • substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity.
  • compounds as described herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
  • a detectable marker e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated
  • the present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described herein in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound as described herein.
  • Such conditions include, for example, appetite disorders, obesity, dependency disorders such as alcohol dependency and nicotine dependency, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, memory disorders, cognitive disorders, movement disorders, metabolic disorders and bone loss.
  • methods for suppressing appetite in a patient, comprising administering to the patient an appetite reducing amount of at least one substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described herein.
  • the present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions, comprising (a) a first agent that is a substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described above, (b) a second agent that is suitable for treating an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder or bone loss; and (c) a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • a first agent that is a substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described above
  • a second agent that is suitable for treating an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder or bone loss
  • a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient comprising (a) a first agent that is a substituted heteroaryl CB
  • the present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a composition comprising a substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described above in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to CB1 modulation.
  • the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of CB1 in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to CB1; and (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound bound to CB1.
  • the invention provides methods of preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
  • the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists.
  • Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo in a variety of contexts as described herein.
  • substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists encompasses all compounds of Formula I, and includes pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and esters of such compounds. It will be apparent that, unless otherwise specified herein, such formulas encompass compounds in which one or both of Ar 1 and Ar 2 is a heterocycle, as well as compounds in which neither Ar 1 nor Ar 2 is a heterocycle. Compounds in which neither, one or both of Ar 1 and Ar 2 is aromatic are also encompassed.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication.
  • Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids.
  • Specific pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, salts of acids such as hydrochloric, phosphoric, hydrobromic, malic, glycolic, fumaric, sulfuric, sulfamic, sulfanilic, formic, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, benzene sulfonic, ethane disulfonic, 2-hydroxyethylsulfonic, nitric, benzoic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, citric, tartaric, lactic, stearic, salicylic, glutamic, ascorbic, pamoic, succinic, fumaric, maleic, propionic, hydroxymaleic, hydroiodic, phenylacetic, alkanoic such as acetic, HOOC—(CH 2 ) n —COOH where n is 0-4, and the like.
  • acids such as hydrochloric, phosphoric, hydrobromic, malic, glycolic, fumaric,
  • pharmaceutically acceptable cations include, but are not limited to sodium, potassium, calcium, aluminum, lithium and ammonium.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts for the compounds provided herein, including those listed by Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., p. 1418 (1985).
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method.
  • such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
  • nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile
  • prodrugs of the compounds provided herein are a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound provided herein.
  • a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein.
  • Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively.
  • Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate, phosphate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein.
  • Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds.
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon.
  • Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 8 alkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 6 alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 4 alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl or 3-methylpentyl.
  • C 0 -C 4 alkyl refers to a single covalent bond (C 0 ) or an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms; “C 0 -C 6 alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 6 alkylene group; “C 0 -C 8 alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 8 alkylene group.
  • a substituent of an alkyl group is indicated, as in the term “C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl,” which refers to a C 1 -C 4 alkyl group that is substituted with one or more hydroxy groups, and “C 1 -C 4 aminoalkyl,” which refers to a C 1 -C 4 alkyl group that is substituted with one or more —NH 2 groups.
  • Alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl group, as defined above.
  • C 1 -C 4 alkylene is an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms.
  • Alkenyl refers to straight or branched chain alkene groups, which comprise at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl and C 2 -C 4 alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. “Alkynyl” refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond.
  • Alkynyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkynyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl and C 2 -C 4 alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • a “cycloalkyl” is a saturated or partially saturated cyclic group in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl, as well as partially saturated variants thereof. Certain cycloalkyl groups are C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, in which the ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members, all of which are carbon.
  • a “(C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl” is a C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkylene group.
  • alkoxy is meant an alkyl group attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • Alkoxy groups include C 1 -C 6 alkoxy and C 1 -C 4 alkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3-methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups.
  • Alkylthio refers to an alkyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge.
  • Alkylsulfinyl refers to groups of the formula —(SO)-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfinyl groups include C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfinyl and C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfinyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Alkylsulfonyl refers to groups of the formula —SO 2 -alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl and C 1 -C 4 alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. “C 1 -C 4 haloalkylsulfonyl” is an alkylsulfonyl group of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms that is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonyl).
  • halogen e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonyl
  • C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonylC 0 -C 4 alkyl is a C 1 -C 6 alkylsulfonyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkylene group.
  • (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)sulfonyl refers to groups of the formula —(SO 2 )—(C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl), in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment.
  • alkanoyl refers to an acyl group (e.g., —C ⁇ O)alkyl), where attachment is through the carbon of the keto group.
  • Alkanoyl groups include C 2 -C 8 alkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkanoyl and C 2 -C 4 alkanoyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • C 1 alkanoyl refers to —C ⁇ O)H, which (along with C 2 -C 8 alkanoyl) is encompassed by the term “C 1 -C 8 alkanoyl.”
  • Ethanoyl is C 2 alkanoyl.
  • haloalkanoyl e.g., C 1 -C 2 haloalkanoyl
  • alkanoyl group is an alkanoyl group in which one or more hydrogens on the alkyl portion is replaced with the corresponding number of independently chosen halogens.
  • alkanone is a ketone group in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement.
  • C 3 -C 8 alkanone refers to an alkanone having from 3 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • a C 3 alkanone has the structure —CH 2 —C ⁇ O—CH 3 .
  • alkyl ether refers to a linear or branched ether substituent.
  • Alkyl ether groups include C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether and C 2 -C 4 alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • a C 2 alkyl ether has the structure —CH 2 —O—CH 3 .
  • alkoxycarbonyl refers to an alkoxy group linked via a carbonyl (i.e., a group having the general structure —C( ⁇ O)—O-alkyl).
  • Alkoxycarbonyl groups include C 1 -C 8 , C 1 -C 6 and C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group.
  • C 1 alkoxycarbonyl refers to —C( ⁇ O)—O—CH 3 .
  • Alkanoyloxy refers to an alkanoyl group linked via an oxygen bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure —C( ⁇ O)-alkyl). Alkanoyloxy groups include C 2 -C 8 , C 2 -C 6 and C 2 -C 4 alkanoyloxy groups, which have from 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. “C 2 alkanoyloxy” refers to —C( ⁇ O)—O—CH 3 .
  • Alkylamino refers to a secondary or tertiary amine that has the general structure —NH-alkyl or —N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups.
  • groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)amino groups, in which each C 1 -C 8 alkyl may be the same or different, as well as mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino groups and mono- and di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino groups.
  • Alkylaminoalkyl refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkylene group (i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene-N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups.
  • alkylene group i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene-N(alkyl)(alkyl)
  • Alkylaminoalkyl groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)aminoC 1 -C 8 alkyl, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 1 -C 6 alkyl and mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 6 alkyl” refers to a mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino group linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 6 alkylene group.
  • alkylaminoalkyl groups The following are representative alkylaminoalkyl groups: It will be apparent that the definition of “alkyl” as used in the terms “alkylamino” and “alkylaminoalkyl” differs from the definition of “alkyl” used for all other alkyl-containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl).
  • aminocarbonyl refers to an amide group (i.e., —C( ⁇ O)NH 2 ).
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonylC 0 -C 4 alkyl” refers to an aminocarbonyl group in which one or both hydrogens are replaced with an independently selected C 1 -C 6 alkyl group, and which is linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkylene group.
  • aminosulfonyl refers to a sulfonamide group (i.e., —SO 2 NH 2 ).
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonylC 0 -C 4 alkyl” refers to an aminosulfonyl group in which one or both hydrogens are replaced with an independently selected C 1 -C 6 alkyl group, and which is linked via a single covalent bond or a C 1 -C 4 alkylene group.
  • halogen refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • haloalkyl is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more independently chosen halogens (e.g., “C 1 -C 8 haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 8 carbon atoms; “C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms).
  • haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-1-trifluoromethyl-ethyl.
  • Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl.
  • haloalkoxy refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • C 1 -C 8 haloalkoxy have 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • a dash (“—”) that is not between two letters or numbers is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent.
  • —C( ⁇ O)NH 2 is attached through the carbon atom.
  • a “carbocycle” has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, each of which has only carbon ring members.
  • a carbocycle that has a single ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members (i.e., C 3 -C 8 carbocycles); rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members (i.e., C 4 -C 7 carbocycles or C 5 -C 7 carbocycles) are recited in certain embodiments.
  • Carbocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members.
  • Carbocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated.
  • a carbocycle may be a cycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated as described above) or an aryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic).
  • Representative aromatic carbocycles are phenyl, naphthyl and biphenyl.
  • preferred carbocycles have a single ring, such as phenyl and C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl groups.
  • a “heterocycle” (also referred to herein as a “heterocyclic group”) has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom independently chosen from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon).
  • a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring.
  • Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members.
  • Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO 2 .
  • Heterocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated.
  • Certain heterocycles are 4- to 10-membered or 5- to 10-membered, which comprise one or two rings—in certain embodiments, such heterocycles are monocyclic (e.g., 4- to 8-membered, 5- to 8-membered, 5- to 7-membered, or 5- or 6-membered); in other embodiments, such heterocycles are 9- or 10-membered bicyclic heterocycles.
  • heterocycles are heteroaryl groups (i.e., at least one heterocyclic ring within the group is aromatic), such as a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl (which may be monocyclic or bicyclic) or a 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., pyridyl or pyrimidyl).
  • Other heterocycles are heterocycloalkyl groups.
  • Certain heterocycles may be linked by a single covalent bond or via an alkylene group, as indicated, for example, by the terms “(6-membered heteroarylC 0 -C 4 alkyl” and “(4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl.” Any heterocycle may, but need not, be bridged.
  • a heterocycle that is “bridged” comprises an alkylene (e.g., methylene or ethylene) link between non-adjacent ring atoms (typically carbon atoms).
  • alkylene e.g., methylene or ethylene
  • a “substituent,” as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest.
  • a “ring substituent” may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group discussed herein that is covalently bonded to an atom (such as a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member.
  • substitution refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent as described above, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
  • Groups that are “optionally substituted” are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different).
  • Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase “substituted with from 0 to X substituents,” where X is the maximum number of possible substituents.
  • Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substitutents).
  • CB1 refers to the human cannabinoid receptor reported by Hoeche et al. (1991) New Biol. 3(9):880-85, as well as allelic variants thereof and homologues thereof found in other species.
  • a “CB1 antagonist” is a compound that detectably inhibits signal transduction mediated by CB1. Such inhibition may be determined using the representative agonist-induced GTP binding assay provided in Example 64.
  • Preferred CB1 antagonists have an IC 50 of 2 ⁇ M or less in this assay, more preferably 1 ⁇ M or less, and still more preferably 500 nM or less or 100 nM or less.
  • the CB1 antagonist is specific for CB1 (i.e., the IC 50 value in a similar assay performed using the predominantly peripheral cannabinoid receptor CB2 is greater than 2 ⁇ M and/or the IC 50 ratio (CB2/CB1) is at least 10, preferably 100, and more preferably at least 1000).
  • CB1 antagonists preferably have minimal agonist activity (i.e., induce an increase in the basal activity of CB1 that is less than 5% of the increase that would be induced by one EC 50 of the agonist CP55,940, and more preferably have no detectable agonist activity within the assay described in Example 64).
  • CB1 antagonists for use as described herein are generally non-toxic.
  • CB1 antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists.
  • a “neutral antagonist” of CB1 is a compound that inhibits the activity of CB1 agonist (e.g., endocannabinoids) at CB1, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a GTP binding assay as described in Example 64 performed in the absence of agonist, CB1 activity is reduced by no more than 10%, more preferably by no more than 5%, and even more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity).
  • Neutral antagonists may, but need not, also inhibit the binding of agonist to CB1.
  • An “inverse agonist” of CB1 is a compound that reduces the activity of CB1 below its basal activity level in the absence of activating concentrations of agonist. Inverse agonists may also inhibit the activity of agonist at CB1, and/or may inhibit binding of CB1 agonist to CB1.
  • the ability of a compound to inhibit the binding of CB1 agonists to the CB1 receptor may be measured by a binding assay, such as the radioligand binding assay given in Example 63.
  • the reduction in basal activity of CB1 produced by an inverse agonist may be determined from a GTP binding assay, such as the assay of Example 64.
  • a “non-competitive CB1 antagonist” is a CB1 antagonist that (1) does not detectably inhibit binding of CB1 agonist (e.g., CP55,940) to CB1 at antagonist concentrations up to 10 ⁇ M and (2) reduces the maximal functional response elicited by agonist.
  • CB1 agonist e.g., CP55,940
  • Compounds that satisfy these two conditions may be identified using the assays provided herein. Such compounds generally do not display detectable activity in the competition binding assay described in Example 63.
  • a non-competitive antagonist concentration -dependently reduces the maximal functional response elicited by agonist without altering agonist EC 50 .
  • the suppression of functional activity by a non-competitive antagonist cannot be overcome by increasing agonist concentrations (i.e., the antagonist activity is insurmountable).
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from a condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including the alleviation of one or more symptoms of dependency or an appetite disorder, or the promotion of weight loss. In the case of appetite suppression, a therapeutically effective amount is sufficient to decrease patient appetite, as assessed using patient reporting or actual food intake.
  • a therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to result in detectable alteration in CB1-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided herein).
  • a body fluid such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine
  • the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically, effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
  • a “patient” is any individual treated with a compound as provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to CB1 modulation or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered to be at risk for the development of such symptoms).
  • the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of appetite disorders, obesity and addictive disorders. Such compounds may also be used within in vitro assays (e.g., assays for CB1 activity), as probes for detection and localization of CB1 and within assays to identify other CB1 antagonists, including non-competitive CB1 antagonists.
  • variable “C” is N.
  • A is CR 1 , and B is N; in other such compounds, A is N and B is CR 1 ; and in still further compounds, A and B are both N; or A and B are both CR 1 .
  • Formula I (and, unless otherwise specified, other formulas recited herein) encompasses compounds with any of the following core structures:
  • R 1 groups include, for example, (i) hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl; and (ii) C 1 -C 4 alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalky
  • C is nitrogen and B is CH or carbon substituted with halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or C 1 -C 6 haloalkoxy.
  • R 1 groups at the “A” or “C” position may alternatively be taken together with R 2 or R 9 to form a fused carbocycle or heterocycle, each of which is optionally substituted. Certain such compounds satisfy Formula VIII or Formula VIIIa: wherein:
  • Ar 1 and Ar 2 are independently chosen from 5- to 7-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from R A , as described above.
  • at least one of Ar 1 and Ar 2 is aromatic; in further embodiments, at least one of Ar 1 and Ar 2 is a heterocycle.
  • Ar 1 groups include phenyl and pyridyl (e.g., pyridin-4-yl), each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents (e.g., 0, 1, 2 or 3 substituents) or with 1 or 2 substitutents independently chosen from halogen (e.g., chloro, bromo or fluoro), cyano, aminocarbonyl, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl. Certain such Ar 1 groups are substituted with one or two halogens (e.g., 2-chloro-pyridin-4-yl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl or 2,4-dichlorophenyl).
  • substituents e.g., 0, 1, 2 or 3 substituents
  • Ar 1 groups include cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexyl) and heterocycloalkyl groups (e.g., a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl group, such as piperazinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl), each of which is optionally substituted as described above, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen (e.g., chloro, bromo or fluoro), cyano, aminocarbonyl, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl.
  • Ar 1 is morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • Ar 2 groups include phenyl, pyrrolyl and pyridyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents (e.g., 1 or 2 substituents) independently chosen from (i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl; and (ii) C 1 -C 4 alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • substituents e.g., 1 or 2 substituents
  • Ar 2 groups are substituted with one or more halogens (e.g., 2-chloro-pyridin-4-yl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl or 2,4-dichlorophenyl).
  • halogens e.g., 2-chloro-pyridin-4-yl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl or 2,4-dichlorophenyl.
  • both Ar 1 and Ar 2 are both 4-fluorophenyl or 4-chlorophenyl.
  • Additional representative Ar 2 groups include cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexyl) and heterocycloalkyl groups, such as a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl (e.g., piperazinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl), each of which is optionally substituted (i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 4 haloalkoxy, C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C 1 -C 4 alkanoyl; and (ii) C 1 -C 4 alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)a
  • X is N(R 2 ), X is C(R 9 )(R 10 ), or X is O. Certain such compounds satisfy one of the following Subformulas A-EJ:
  • CB1 antagonists are CB1 antagonists. Certain such compounds are non-competitive CB1 antagonists. In addition, or alternatively, certain compounds provided herein display CB1 specificity. CB1 antagonist activity may be confirmed using an agonist-induced GTP binding assay, such as the assay described in Example 64, herein. Such assays employ a CB1-containing cell membrane preparation (e.g., a preparation of membranes of insect cells that recombinantly express CB1) to determine the effect of a test compound on CB1 agonist-induced GTP binding to CB1.
  • CB1-containing cell membrane preparation e.g., a preparation of membranes of insect cells that recombinantly express CB1
  • a first cell membrane preparation comprising CB1 is contacted with: (i) labeled GTP; (ii) a CB1 agonist; and (iii) a test compound to yield a test membrane preparation.
  • a second cell membrane preparation comprising CB1 is contacted with: (i) labeled GTP; and (ii) a CB1 agonist to yield a control membrane preparation.
  • the labeled GTP is preferably GTP ⁇ 35 S; a representative CB1 agonist is CP55,940.
  • Such contact is performed under conditions that are suitable for GTP binding to CB1, such as the conditions described in Example 64.
  • concentrations of labeled GTP and CB1 agonist used are generally concentrations that are sufficient to result in a detectable increase in the amount of labeled GTP bound to the membrane preparation in the presence of CB1 agonist. Such concentrations may be determined by routine experimentation; representative suitable concentrations are provided in Example 64. Generally, a range of test compound concentrations is used (e.g., ranging from 10 ⁇ 10 m to 10 ⁇ 5 M).
  • a signal that corresponds to (represents) the amount of bound, labeled GTP is detected (typically, unbound labeled GTP is first removed via a washing step).
  • a test signal that represents an amount of bound, labeled GTP in the test membrane preparation is detected; and
  • a control signal that represents an amount of bound, labeled GTP in the control membrane preparation is detected.
  • the nature of the signal detected is determined by the type of label used. For example, if the GTP is radioactively labeled, the signal detected is radioactive decay (e.g., via liquid scintillation spectrometry).
  • the CB1 antagonist activity of the test compound is then determined by comparing the test signal with the control signal. A test signal that is lower than the control signal indicates that the test compound is a CB1 antagonist.
  • preferred compounds are cannabinoid receptor-specific. This means that they only bind to, activate, or inhibit the activity of certain receptors other than cannabinoid receptors (preferably other than CB1) with affinity constants of greater than 100 nanomolar, preferably greater than 1 micromolar, more preferably greater than 4 micromolar. Alternatively, or in addition, such compounds exhibit 200-fold greater affinity for CB1 than for other cellular receptors.
  • cannabinoid receptors include histamine receptors, bioactive peptide receptors (including NPY receptors such as NPY Y5), and hormone receptors (e.g., melanin-concentrating hormone receptors).
  • compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred compound is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred compound produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred compound exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.D.
  • T.I.D. dosing preferably T.I.D. dosing, more preferably B.I.D. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing).
  • differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable. Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use. For example, assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers. Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously). Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays. Compound half-life is inversely proportional to the frequency of dosage of a compound. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described herein.
  • nontoxic compounds are nontoxic.
  • the term “nontoxic” as used herein shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans).
  • FDA United States Food and Drug Administration
  • a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
  • a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 66, herein.
  • cells treated as described in Example 66 with 100 ⁇ M of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • a compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals.
  • statically significant is meant results varying from control at the p ⁇ 0.1 level or more preferably at the p ⁇ 0.05 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
  • a compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 5 , or IC 50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g. dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory rodents by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities such as CYP1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
  • compounds provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled.
  • such compounds may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 O, 17 O, 31 P, 32 P, 35 S, 18 F and 36 Cl.
  • substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2 H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Suitable protecting groups and methodology for protection and deprotection such as those described in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene, are well known. Compounds and intermediates requiring protection/deprotection will be readily apparent.
  • Scheme 1 illustrates a method for preparing compounds of Formula I wherein X is NR 2 .
  • dichloropyrazine 1 is reacted with primary or secondary amine in the presence of base and heat to provide 2-amino-6-chloropyrazine 2.
  • Bromination of 2 in step 2 provides 2-amino-5-bromo-6-chloropyrazine 3.
  • Step 3 entails Suzuki cross-coupling with aryl or heteroaryl boronic acid to provide 4. Further reaction of 4 in step 4 with aryl boronic acid under Suzuki cross-coupling conditions provides diarylpyrazine 5 (i.e., compound of Formula I wherein R 1 is hydrogen).
  • Diarylpyrazine 5 may be further elaborated in step 5 by bromination to produce tetrasubstituted pyrazine 6.
  • Bromo derivative 6 may be reacted in step 6 with an alkylamine to produce compounds of Formula I wherein R 1 is alkylamino (7).
  • R 1 is alkylamino (7).
  • bromine in compound 6 can readily be converted to a variety of other substituents including aryl, alkyl and alkoxy by standard procedures.
  • a variety of well-known alternative cross-coupling strategies can be employed to introduce Ar 1 and Ar 2 .
  • aryl or heteroaryl tin compounds may be employed in the coupling reactions.
  • palladium-catalyzed amination can be conducted in step 3 or step 4 to introduce a saturated heterocycle such as morpholine as Ar 1 or Ar 2 .
  • Scheme 2 illustrates a variation of Scheme 1 wherein the order of steps is modified to introduce Ar 1 prior to bromination.
  • Scheme 3 illustrates a method of preparing compounds of Formula I wherein X is oxygen and R 1 is cyano.
  • diketone 10 is condensed with diaminomaleonitrile 11 under acidic conditions to provide dicyanopyrazine 12.
  • Step 2 entails displacement of one of the cyano groups with alkoxide to produce 13. If Ar 1 and Ar 2 are not equivalent, step 2 yields a mixture of compounds that must be separated by chromatography.
  • the cyano group in 13 can be further elaborated via a variety of standard methods.
  • Scheme 4 provides a method for preparing compounds of Formula I wherein X is oxygen, R 1 is hydrogen and Ar 1 is equivalent to Ar 2 .
  • Step 1 entails Suzuki coupling reaction of dichloropyazine 14 to obtain diarylpyrazine 15.
  • the N-oxide of diarylpyrazine 15 is prepared by standard methodology.
  • Treatment of N-oxide 16 with phosphorous oxychloride in step 3 provides chloropyrazine 17.
  • Reaction of chloropyrazine 17 with alkoxide in step 4 provides alkoxypyrazine 18.
  • Scheme 6 illustrates a method for preparing pyrimidines of Formula I wherein X is nitrogen.
  • dialkoxybromopyrimidine 18 is reacted with aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to obtain arylpyrimidine 19.
  • Demethylation of 19 in step 2 under acidic conditions provides dihydroxypyrimidine 20.
  • Treatment of 20 with phosphorous oxychloride in step 3 provides dichloropyrimidine 21.
  • dichloropyrimidine 21 is treated with alkylamine in the presence of base to provide, after separation from the resulting isomeric mixture of displacement products, 2-aminopyrimidine 22.
  • Arylation in Step 5 provides 23.
  • Scheme 5 can readily be modified to produce compounds of Formula I wherein Ar 1 or Ar 2 is a saturated heterocycle such as morpholine.
  • Scheme 7 provides a method for preparing certain triazines of Formula I.
  • step 1 an aqueous solution of S-methyl-thio-semicarbazide hydrogen iodide 25 is reacted with oxo-aryl-acetic acid methyl ester 24 to obtain 3-thiomethyltriazine 26.
  • Oxidation of 26 to the corresponding sulfone 27 is accomplished in step 2.
  • step 3 the sulfone group is displaced with substituted amine to obtain 3-aminotriazine 28.
  • Treatment of 28 with sodium methanethiolate followed by reaction with phosphorous oxychloride in step 4 provides chlorotriazine 29.
  • Arylation of 29 under standard Suzuki coupling conditions provides 30.
  • Scheme 8 illustrates a method for preparing diaryl pyridine compounds of Formula I wherein C is nitrogen.
  • 2-chloro-3-hydroxypyridine 31 is alkylated with alkyl halide (RBr or RI) and converted to the corresponding iodopyridine 32 wherein the substituent OR is an alkoxy substituent.
  • Step 2 entails selective displacement of the chloro substituent in 32 to obtain aminopyridine 33.
  • 33 is brominated or chlorinated to obtain dihalopyridine 34.
  • Selective reaction of the iodo substitutent in 34 in step 4 under Suzuki coupling conditions provides aryl pyridine 35. Further Suzuki reaction of 35 in step 5 provides diaryl pyridine 36.
  • Scheme 9 provides a method for the preparation of certain pyridines of formula I.
  • 2,6-dibromopyridine 37 is heated with an amine in the presence of a base and optionally a solvent to afford the 2-bromo-6-aminopyridine 38 which is reacted with an aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to obtain arylpyridine 39.
  • Bromination of 39 in step 3 provides the bromo-pyridine 40 which is further reacted with an aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to give the diaryl pyridine 41.
  • Scheme 10 illustrates a method for the preparation of certain pyridines of formula I.
  • 2,4-Dichloropyridine 42 is heated with an amine in the presence of a base and optionally a solvent to afford the 4-chloro-2-aminopyridine 43.
  • Reacting 43 with an arylboronic acid under Suzuki reaction conditions results in the 4-arylpyridine 44.
  • Pyridine 44 is brominated and the resulting bromo-pyridine 45 is reacted with an arylboronic acid under Suzuki reaction conditions results in the diaryl pyridine 46.
  • Scheme 11 provides a method for the preparation of certain pyridines of formula I.
  • step 1 3,6-dibromopyridine 47 is heated with an amine in under Buchwald type conditions to afford the 3-bromo-5-aminopyridine 48.
  • This pyridine 48 is reacted with an aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to obtain aryl pyridine 49.
  • Bromination of 49 in step 3 provides the bromo-pyridine 50 which is further reacted with an aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to give the diaryl pyridine 51.
  • Scheme 12 provides a method for preparing diaryl pyridazines of Formula I.
  • step 1 52 is cyclized under acidic conditions to provide aryl maleic anhydride 53.
  • Reaction of aryl maleic anhydride 53 with hydrazine in step 2 provides 54.
  • step 3 54 is converted to dichloropyridazine 55 by heating with phosphorous oxychloride.
  • Treatment of dichloropyridazine 55 with alkylamine and base in step 4 provides a mixture of products. In some cases, the yield for this reaction can be improved by use of palladium (0) catalyst (e.g. Buchwald coupling conditions). Separation of the desired aminopyridazine product 56 followed by reaction under Suzuki conditions provides diaryl pyridazine 57.
  • palladium (0) catalyst e.g. Buchwald coupling conditions
  • a compound provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms.
  • Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms.
  • All stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers (i.e., optically active forms).
  • Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
  • Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope.
  • Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14 C), hydrogen (e.g., 3 H), sulfur (e.g., 35 S) or iodine (e.g., 125 I).
  • Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous-catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate.
  • certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate.
  • Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
  • compositions comprising one or more compounds provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives.
  • other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral (including, but not limited to, sublingual), nasal, rectal or parenteral administration.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique.
  • compositions suitable for oral use are preferred.
  • Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs.
  • compositions of the present invention may be formulated as a lyophilizate.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations.
  • Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc).
  • inert diluents e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate
  • granulating and disintegrating agents e.g., corn starch or
  • the tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period.
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
  • an inert solid diluent e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions.
  • excipients include suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monoole
  • Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations.
  • Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, suspending agent and one or more preservatives.
  • a dispersing or wetting agent e.g., glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerin, glycerin, glycerin, glycerin, glycerin, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, sorbitol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol, glycerol
  • compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally-occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate).
  • An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • sweetening agents such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose.
  • Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components.
  • Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery.
  • Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols (e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols (e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid-based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices.
  • organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin
  • glycols e.g., butylene, isoprene or
  • a composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials.
  • stabilizing agents such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
  • a topical formulation may be prepared in a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions.
  • Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing. Controlled release vehicles can also be used.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile indictable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • the compound(s) provided herein, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle.
  • Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • suitable dispersing, wetting and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of indictable compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • compositions may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration).
  • Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
  • suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane).
  • a conventional propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane.
  • compositions may be formulated for release at a pre-determined rate.
  • Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract).
  • Controlled release formulations i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration
  • a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period.
  • One type of controlled-release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate.
  • the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours.
  • Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled-release coating.
  • the release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • the matrix material which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s).
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet).
  • active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying.
  • additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution).
  • the matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form.
  • a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium).
  • the controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free.
  • Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH-independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body).
  • pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
  • the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration.
  • Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing.
  • Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACOAT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, Pa.) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, Pa.), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EUDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, N.J.) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin.
  • Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
  • Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion.
  • the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use.
  • pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses (e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water-soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts.
  • a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,668,232).
  • controlled release formulations may be found, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,524,060; 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128; 5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474; 5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394; 6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094; 6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference for
  • a compound provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock).
  • Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
  • Compound(s) provided herein are generally administered in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day (e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses (e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
  • the amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated and the particular mode of administration. Dosage units will generally contain from about 10 ⁇ g to about 500 mg of an active ingredient. In certain embodiments, the dosage unit contains an amount of the compound that is sufficient to effect a decrease in the patient's caloric intake (i.e., an appetite-suppressing amount) following single dose administration or repeated administration according to a predetermined regimen. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art.
  • compositions may be used for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation.
  • Such conditions include, for example:
  • CNS disorders e.g., anxiety, depression, panic disorder, bipolar disorder, psychosis, schizophrenia, behavioral addiction, dementia (including memory loss, Alzheimer's disease, dementia of aging, vascular dementia, mild cognitive impairment, age-related cognitive decline, and mild neurocognitive disorder), attention deficit disorder (ADD/ADHD), stress, amnesia, cognitive disorders, memory disorders, neurodegeneration, cerebellar and spinocerebellar disorder, cranial trauma, cerebral vascular accidents, obsessive-compulsive disorder, senile dementia, impulsivity), thymic disorders, septic shock, Tourette's syndrome, Huntington's chorea, Raynaud's syndrome, peripheral neuropathy, diabetes (type II or non insulin dependent), glaucoma, migraine, seizure disorders, epilepsy, locomotor disorders (movement disorders induced by medicaments, dyskinesias or Parkinson's disease), respiratory disorders (such as asthma), gastrointestinal disorders (e.g., dysfunction of gastrointestinal disorders (e.g., dysfunction of
  • the condition responsive to CB1 modulation is an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder and/or bone loss.
  • compositions provided herein comprise a first agent that is a compound as provided herein in combination with a second agent that differs in structure from the first agent and is suitable for treating the condition of interest.
  • the second agent is not a CB1 antagonist as provided herein.
  • the second agent is suitable for treating an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder and/or bone loss.
  • Representative second agents for use within such pharmaceutical compositions include anti-obesity agents such as MCH receptor antagonists, apo-B/MTP inhibitors, 11 ⁇ -hydroxy steroid dehydrogenase-1 inhibitors, peptide YY 3 -36 or an analog thereof, MCR-4 agonists, CCK-A agonists, monoamine reuptake inhibitors, sympathomimetic agents, ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists, dopamine agonists, melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor analogues, 5-HT2c receptor agonists, leptin or an analog thereof, leptin receptor agonists, galanin antagonists, lipase inhibitors, bombesin agonists, neuropeptide-Y receptor antagonists, thyromimetic agents, dehydroepiandrosterone or analog thereof, glucocorticoid receptor antagonists, orexin receptor antagonists, glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists, ciliary neurotrophic factors,
  • Representative second agents suitable for treating an addictive disorder include, for example, Methadone, LAAM (levo-alpha-acetyl-methadol), naltrexone (e.g., ReViaTM), ondansetron (e.g., Zofran®), sertraline (e.g., Zoloft®), fluoxetine (e.g., Prozac®), diazepam (e.g., Valium®) and chlordiazepoxide (e.g., Librium), varenicline and buproprion (e.g., Zyban® or Wellbutrin®).
  • Other representative second agents for use within the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein include nicotine receptor partial agonists, opioid antagonists and/or dopaminergic agents.
  • compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to CB1 modulation (e.g., treatment of appetite disorder, obesity and/or addictive disorder, or other disorder indicated above).
  • Packaged pharmaceutical preparations generally comprise a container holding a pharmaceutical composition as described above and instructions (e.g., labeling) indicating that the composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation in a patient.
  • a packaged pharmaceutical preparation comprises one or more compounds provided herein and one or more additional agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same container (i.e., as a mixture).
  • Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like).
  • the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the components are to be taken together for the treatment of an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder and/or bone loss.
  • the present invention provides methods for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation in a patient and/or for appetite suppression.
  • the patient may be afflicted with such a condition, or may be free of symptoms but considered at risk for developing such a condition.
  • a condition is “responsive to CB1 modulation” if the condition or symptom(s) thereof are alleviated, attenuated, delayed or otherwise improved by modulation of CB1 activity.
  • Such conditions include, for example, appetite disorders, obesity, addictive disorders, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, memory disorders, cognitive disorders, movement disorders, metabolic disorders and bone loss, as well as other disorders indicated above.
  • such methods comprise administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound as provided herein.
  • compounds provided herein may be administered alone or in combination with one or more additional agents that are suitable for treating the disorder of interest.
  • additional agent(s) may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order.
  • Representative additional agents for use in such methods include the second agents described above.
  • Suitable dosages for compounds provided herein are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of any additional agent(s) can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions or in the Physician's Desk Reference . In certain embodiments, combination administration results in a reduction of the dosage of the additional agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount). Thus, preferably, the dosage of additional agent in a combination or combination treatment method of the invention is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the agent without combination with a compound of Formula I.
  • this dose is less than 3 ⁇ 4, even more preferably less than 1 ⁇ 2, and highly preferably less than 1 / 4 of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the agent(s) when administered without combination administration as described herein. It will be apparent that the dose of compound as provided herein needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be affected by the dose and potency of the additional agent.
  • Administration to the patient can be by way of any means discussed above, including oral, topical, nasal or transdermal administration, or intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intrathecal, epidural, intracerebroventrilcular or like injection.
  • Oral administration is preferred in certain embodiments (e.g., formulated as pills, capsules, tablets or the like).
  • Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated. In general, a dosage regimen of 4 times daily or less is preferred, with 1 or 2 times daily particularly preferred. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. Dosages are generally as described above; in general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented. For example, treatment of obesity is considered to be effective if it results in a statistically significant decrease in weight or BMI.
  • the present invention provides a variety of non-pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the compounds provided herein.
  • such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of CB1 (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof).
  • compounds provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites.
  • compounds provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity, as standards for determining the ability of a candidate agent to bind to CB1, or as radiotracers for positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or for single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT).
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • SPECT single photon emission computerized tomography
  • Such methods can be used to characterize CB1 receptors in living subjects.
  • a compound may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and incubated with a sample for a suitable incubation time (e.g., determined by first assaying a time course of binding).
  • unbound compound is removed (e.g., by washing), and bound compound detected using any method suitable for the label employed (e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups).
  • any method suitable for the label employed e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups.
  • a matched sample containing labeled compound and a greater (e.g., 10-fold greater) amount of unlabeled compound may be processed in the same manner. A greater amount of detectable label remaining in the test sample than in the control indicates the presence of CB1 in the sample.
  • Detection assays including receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of CB1 in cultured cells or tissue samples may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York.
  • Compounds provided herein may further be used within assays for the identification of other non-competitive antagonists of CB1.
  • assays are standard competition binding assays, in which a labeled compound as provided herein is displaced by a test compound.
  • such assays are performed by: (a) contacting CB1 with a labeled (e.g., radiolabeled) compound and a test compound, under conditions that permit binding to CB1 (b) removing unbound labeled compound and unbound test compound; (c) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled compound; and (d) comparing the signal to a reference signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled compound in a similar assay performed in the absence of test compound.
  • the reference signal and the signal described in step (c) are generally obtained simultaneously (e.g., the assays are performed in different wells of the same plate); in addition, multiple concentrations of test compound are generally assayed. Non-competitive antagonist activity can be confirmed for test compounds that decrease the amount of bound, labeled compound using procedures described herein.
  • Mass spectroscopy data in the following Examples is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Micromass, Beverly Mass.), equipped with a Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp.; Milford, Mass.), Waters 996 photodiode array detector, and a Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, Wis.). MassLynx (Advanced Chemistry Development, Inc; Toronto, Canada) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx Global ServerTM, OpenLynxTM and AutoLynxTM processing is used for data collection and analysis.
  • Sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50 ⁇ 4.6 mm Chromolith SpeedROD RP-18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at a flow rate of 6 ml/min. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340 nm UV range.
  • the elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A—95% water, 5% MeOH with 0.05% TFA; Mobile Phase B—5% water, 95% MeOH with 0.025% TFA.
  • the following gradient is used: 0-0.5 min 10-100% B, hold at 100% B to 1.2 min, return to 10% B at 1.21 min. Inject to inject cycle is 2.15 min.
  • step 2 is converted to the title compound via the Suzuki coupling procedure described in Example 4, Step 1.
  • step 3 The product of step 3 is converted to the title compound via the Suzuki coupling procedure described in Example 4, Step 2.
  • 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.51 (d, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.26 (m, 5H), 3.67 (m, 4H), 3.60 (m, 4H), 1.48 (s, 9H).
  • This compound is prepared by reaction of 2-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(1-piperazinyl)-pyrazine with isobutyryl chloride following the procedure given in the previous example.
  • LC-MS: m/z expected 456.4; found 457.2 (MH + ), Rt 1.66 min.
  • step 3 The product of step 3 is converted to the title compound with 4-cyanophenyl boronic acid via the Suzuki coupling procedure used in Example 4, Step 1.
  • LC-MS: m/z expected 348.8; found 350.2 (MH + ), Rt 1.38 min.
  • step 4 The product of step 4 is converted to the title compound via the Suzuki coupling procedure used in Example 4, Step 2.
  • LC-MS: m/z expected 425.9; found 427.2 (MH + ), Rt 1.47 min.
  • tert-Butyl-1-piperazine carboxylate (8.8 g, 47.5 mmol) is added to a suspension of 2,6-dichloro-pyrazine (6.4 g, 43.2 mmol) and potassium carbonate (18.0 g, 130 mmol) in anhydrous acetonitrile (100 mL). After addition, the reaction mixture is stirred at 90° C. for 3 h, and the reaction is monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt and then diluted with ether (100 mL) and water (50 mL). The organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ether (2 ⁇ 100 mL). The combined organic layers are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and the solvents are removed in vacuo to give the title compound as a white solid.
  • reaction mixture is cooled to rt and then diluted with ether (100 mL) and water (50 mL).
  • ether 100 mL
  • water 50 mL
  • the organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ether (2 ⁇ 50 mL).
  • the combined organic layers are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and the solvents are removed in vacuo to give the title compound as an off-white solid.
  • NBS (1.94 g, 10.88 mmol) is added portionwise to a solution of tert-butyl-4-[6-(4-chloro-phenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl)-piperazine-1-carboxylate (4.08 g, 10.88 mmol) in CHCL 3 (50 mL) at 0° C.
  • the reaction is stirred at 0° C. for 1 h, and then allowed to warm to rt and stirred at rt for 2 h.
  • the reaction mixture is diluted with ether (200 mL), washed with water (2 ⁇ 50 mL) and then with brine, and dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 .
  • the solvents are removed in vacuo. Purification using flash column chromatography (silica gel) with 25% EtOAc in hexane as eluent gives the title compound as a pale yellow solid.
  • Arylboronic acid (0.21 mmol) is added to a solution of tert-butyl-4-[5-bromo-(6-chlorophenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-piperazine-1-carboxylate (80 mg, 0.18 mmol) in a mixture of dioxane (3 mL), water (0.5 mL) and 2N sodium carbonate solution (0.18 mL, 0.36 mmol).
  • the solution is degassed by bubbling nitrogen through the solution for 2 min and is then charged with Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 (10 mg, 5 mol %). After addition, the reaction mixture is stirred at 100° C. for 16 h.
  • reaction mixture is cooled to rt and then diluted with ether (10 mL) and water (5 mL).
  • ether 10 mL
  • water 5 mL
  • the organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ether (2 ⁇ 5 mL).
  • the combined organic layers are dried over anhydrous MgSO 4 and the solvents are removed in vacuo. Purification by PTLC gives the corresponding arylation product.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 2-methoxyethanol as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethanol as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 1-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-4-hydroxypiperidine as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and R-( ⁇ )3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydrofuran as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and S-1-(tertbutyloxycarbonyl)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and R-1-(tertbutyloxycarbonyl)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-pyrrolidinone as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-pyrrolidine as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-pyrrolidine-2,5-dione as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)morpholine as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)pyridine as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 2′-(2-hydroxyethyl)pyridine as described in Example 22, Step 4.
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 7 by the reaction of 5-(azetidin-3-yloxy)-2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine with isobutyryl chloride.
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 7 by the reaction of 5-(azetidin-3-yloxy)-2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine with isopropylsulfonyl chloride.
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 10 by the reaction of 5-(azetidin-3-yloxy)-2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine with 2-chloropyrimidine.
  • 5-(4-Chlorophenyl)pyrimidine-2,4-diol (11.0 g, 49.4 mmol) is mixed in POCl 3 100 mL at rt. N,N-Diethylaniline is added, and the reaction mixture is heated to 100° C. for 12 h. The reaction mixture is cooled and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is poured into ice-H 2 O to form a solid. The solid is filtered and washed with H 2 O and dried under vacuum (70° C.) to give the title compound.
  • This compound is prepared from 2-chloro-4-methoxy-phenylboronic acid and [5-bromo-3-(1-ethyl-propoxy)-6-iodo-pyridin-2-yl]-methyl-amine according to the procedure given in Example 4, step 1.
  • This compound is prepared from 4-fluoro-phenylboronic acid and [5-bromo-6-(2-chloro-4-methoxy-phenyl)-3-(1-ethyl-propoxy)-pyridin-2-yl]-methyl-amine according to the procedure given in Example 4, step 2.
  • the combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated to give essentially pure cyclized products as a mixture of two regio-isomers.
  • the cyclized products are dissolved in 3 mL of phosphorus oxychloride, and 21.5 mg of N,N-diethylaniline is added.
  • the resulting mixture is heated at 105° C. for 16 h. After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture is carefully poured into ice-water.
  • the aqueous solution is neutralized with 1 N aqueous NaOH and extracted with EtOAc.
  • the combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated.
  • the Boc group may be replaced with a variety of moieties using, for example, the methods described in Examples 6 and 7.
  • 6-Chloro-2-aminopyrazine (7.8 g, 60 mmol), 3-chloro-pyridyl-4-boronic acid (14 g, 0.18 mol) and Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 (2 g, 5 mol %) in 180 ml of 1,4-dioxone is treated with 150 ml of 2M K 2 CO 3 (0.3 mol).
  • the reaction mixture is heated to 135° C. in a sealed tube overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture is diluted with 250 ml EtOAc. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (2 ⁇ 100 ml). The combined organic layer is washed with sat.
  • 6-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazin-2-ylamine (4.5 g, 21.8 mmol) in 100 ml of CHCl 3 is treated with NBS (3.9 g, 22 mmol) at 0° C. portionwise over 1.5 h.
  • the reaction mixture is stirred for another 2 h and quenched by the addition of 100 ml water.
  • the aqueous layer is extracted with CHCl 3 (3 ⁇ 100 ml).
  • the combined organic layer is washed with sat. brine, dried over MgSO 4 , concentrated and purified by column to give the title compound.
  • the Boc group may be replaced with a variety of moieties using, for example, the methods described in Examples 6 and 7.
  • STEP 7A 4-[5-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRIDAZIN-3-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • This compound is prepared from 6-Chloro-4-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-3-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridazine and tert-butyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate, as described in Step 7A.
  • This Example illustrates the preparation of recombinant baculovirus for use in generating CB1-expressing insect cells.
  • Human CB1 sequence has GenBank Accession Number HSU73304, and was reported by Hoehe et al. (1991) New Biol. 3(9):880-85.
  • Human CB1 (hCB1) cDNA is amplified from a human brain cDNA library (Gibco BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) using PCR, in which the 5′ primer includes the optimal Kozak sequence CCACC.
  • the resulting PCR product is cloned into pcDNA3.1/V5-His-TOPO (Invitrogen Corp, Carlsbad, Calif.) using the multiple cloning site, and then subcloned into pBACPAK 8 (BD Biosciences, Palo Alto, Calif.) at the Bam/Xho site to yield a hCB1 baculoviral expression vector.
  • pcDNA3.1/V5-His-TOPO Invitrogen Corp, Carlsbad, Calif.
  • pBACPAK 8 BD Biosciences, Palo Alto, Calif.
  • the hCB1 baculoviral expression vector is co-transfected along with BACULOGOLD DNA (BD PharMingen, San Diego, Calif.) into Sf9 cells.
  • the Sf9 cell culture supernatant is harvested three days post-transfection.
  • the recombinant virus-containing supernatant is serially diluted in Hink's TNM-FH insect medium (JRH Biosciences, Kansas City, Mo.) supplemented with Grace's salts and with 4.1 mM L-Gln, 3.3 g/L LAH, 3.3 g/L ultrafiltered yeastolate and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (hereinafter “insect medium”) and plaque assayed for recombinant plaques.
  • insect medium heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum
  • recombinant plaques are selected and harvested into 1 ml of insect medium for amplification.
  • Each 1 ml volume of recombinant baculovirus (at passage 0) is used to infect a separate T25 flask containing 2 ⁇ 10 6 Sf9 cells in 5 ml of insect medium.
  • supernatant medium is harvested from each of the T25 infections for use as passage 1 inoculum.
  • Two of seven recombinant baculoviral clones are then chosen for a second round of amplification, using 1 ml of passage 1 stock to infect 1 ⁇ 10 8 cells in 100 ml of insect medium divided into 2 T175 flasks. Forty-eight hours post infection, passage 2 medium from each 100 ml preparation is harvested and plaque assayed for titer. The cell pellets from the second round of amplification are assayed by affinity binding as described below to verify recombinant receptor expression. A third round of amplification is then initiated using a multiplicity of infection of 0.1 to infect a liter of Sf9 cells. Seventy-two hours post-infection the supernatant medium is harvested to yield passage 3 baculoviral stock.
  • Radioligand is 25 pM-5.0 nM [ 3 H]CP55,940 for saturation binding and 0.5 nM for competition binding (New England Nuclear Corp., Boston, Mass.); the hCB1-expressing baculoviral cells are used; the assay buffer contains 50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl 2 , 0.5% BSA and 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin; filtration is carried out using GF/C WHATMAN filters (presoaked in 0.3% non-fat dry milk (H 2 O) for 2 hours prior to use); and the filters are washed twice with 5 mL cold 50 mM Tris pH. 7.4.
  • Titer of the passage 3 baculoviral stock is determined by plaque assay and a multiplicity of infection, incubation time course, binding assay experiment is carried out to determine conditions for optimal receptor expression.
  • Log-phase Sf9 cells (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, Calif.), are infected with one or more stocks of recombinant baculovirus followed by culturing in insect medium at 27° C. Infections are carried out either only with virus directing the expression of hCB1 or with this virus in combination with three G-protein subunit-expression virus stocks: 1) rat G ⁇ t2 G-protein-encoding virus stock, 2) bovine ⁇ 1 G-protein-encoding virus stock, and 3) human ⁇ 2 G-protein-encoding virus stock, all of which are obtained from Biosignal Inc., Montreal, Canada.
  • Typical hCB1 infections are conducted using Sf9 cells that are cultured in insect medium supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (FBS) as discussed above.
  • FBS heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum
  • Higher receptor and G-protein (G ⁇ , G ⁇ , G ⁇ ) expression can be obtained if the Sf9 cells are cultured in insect medium with 5% FBS and 5% Gibco serum-free medium (Invitrogen Corp.; Carlsbad, Calif.). Maximal CB1 expression and functional activity is achieved if the Sf9 cells are cultured in insect medium without FBS and with 10% Gibco serum-free medium.
  • the infections are carried out at a multiplicity of infection of 0.1:1.0:0.5:0.5.
  • a sample of cell suspension is analyzed for viability by trypan blue dye exclusion, and the remaining Sf9 cells are harvested via centrifugation (3000 rpm/10 min/4° C.).
  • Sf9 cell pellets are resuspended in homogenization buffer (10 mM HEPES, 250 mM sucrose, 0.5 ⁇ g/ml leupeptin, 2 ⁇ g/ml Aprotinin, 200 ⁇ M PMSF, and 2.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.4) and homogenized using a POLYTRON homogenizer (setting 5 for 30 seconds).
  • the homogenate is centrifuged (536 ⁇ g/10 min/4° C.) to pellet the nuclei.
  • the supernatant containing isolated membranes is decanted to a clean centrifuge tube, centrifuged (48,000 ⁇ g/30 min, 4° C.) and the resulting pellet resuspended in 30 ml homogenization buffer.
  • P2 membranes The protein concentration of the resulting membrane preparation (hereinafter “P2 membranes”) is measured using a Bradford protein assay (Bio-Rad Laboratories, Hercules, Calif.). By this measure, a 1-liter culture of cells typically yields 100-150 mg of total membrane protein.
  • P2 membranes are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in binding buffer (50 mM Tris pH. 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl 2 , 0.5% BSA and 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin).
  • membranes (10 ⁇ g) are added to polypropylene tubes containing 25 pM-0.5 nM [ 3 H]CP55,940 (New England Nuclear Corp., Boston, Mass.). Nonspecific binding is determined in the presence of 10 ⁇ M CP55,940 (Tocris Cookson Inc., Ellisville, Mo.) and accounted for less than 10% of total binding.
  • GTP ⁇ S is added to duplicate tubes at the final concentration of 50 ⁇ M.
  • membranes (10 ⁇ g) are added to polypropylene tubes containing 0.5 nM [ 3 H]CP55,940.
  • Non-radiolabeled displacers are added to separate assays at concentrations ranging from 10 ⁇ 10 -M to 10 ⁇ 5 M to yield a final volume of 0.250 mL.
  • Nonspecific binding is determined in the presence of 10 ⁇ M CP55,940 and accounted for less than 10% of total binding.
  • the reaction is terminated by rapid vacuum filtration. Samples are filtered over presoaked (0.3% non-fat dry milk for 2 hours prior to use) GF/C WHATMAN filters and rinsed 2 times with 5 mL cold 50 mM Tris pH 7.4. Remaining bound radioactivity is quantified by gamma counting.
  • K i and Hill coefficient (“nH”) are determined by fitting the Hill equation to the measured values with the aid of SIGMAPLOT software (SPSS Inc., Chicago, Ill.).
  • This Example illustrates the use of agonist-stimulated GTP ⁇ 35 S binding (“GTP binding”) activity to identify CB1 agonists and antagonists, and to differentiate neutral antagonists from those that possess inverse agonist activity.
  • GTP binding agonist-stimulated GTP ⁇ 35 S binding
  • This assay can also be used to detect partial agonism mediated by antagonist compounds.
  • a compound being analyzed in this assay is referred to herein as a “test compound.”
  • Agonist-stimulated GTP binding activity is measured as follows: Four independent baculoviral stocks (one directing the expression of hCB1 and three directing the expression of each of the three subunits of a heterotrimeric G-protein) are used to infect a culture of Sf9 cells as described in Example 61.
  • Agonist-stimulated GTP binding on purified membranes is initially assessed using the cannabinoid agonist CP55,940 to ascertain that the receptor/G-protein-alpha-beta-gamma combination(s) yield a functional response as measured by GTP binding.
  • P2 membranes are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in GTP binding assay buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl 2 , 2 mM EGTA, 0.1% BSA, 0.1 mM bacitracin, 100 KIU/mL aprotinin, 5 ⁇ M GDP) and added to reaction tubes at a concentration of 10 ⁇ g protein/reaction tube. After adding increasing doses of the agonist CP55,940 at concentrations ranging from 10 ⁇ 12 M to 10 ⁇ 6 M, reactions are initiated by the addition of 100 pM GTP ⁇ 35 S. In competition experiments, non-radiolabeled test compounds are added to separate assays at concentrations ranging from 10 ⁇ 10 M to 10 ⁇ 5 M along with 1 nM CP55,940 to yield a final volume of 0.25 mL.
  • GTP binding assay buffer 50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM
  • the reactions are terminated by vacuum filtration over GF/C filters (pre-soaked in wash buffer, 0.1% BSA) followed by washing with ice-cold wash buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.0, 120 mM NaCl).
  • the amount of receptor-bound (and thereby membrane-bound) GTP ⁇ 35 S is determined by measuring the bound radioactivity, preferably by liquid scintillation spectrometry of the washed filters.
  • Non-specific binding is determined using 10 mM GTP ⁇ 35 S and typically represents less than 5 percent of total binding. Data is expressed as percent above basal (baseline).
  • the results of these GTP binding experiments are analyzed using SIGMAPLOT software and IC 50 determined. The IC 50 may then be used to generate K; as described by Cheng and Prusoff (1973) Biochem Pharmacol 22(23):3099-108.
  • Neutral antagonists are those test compounds that reduce the CP55,940-stimulated GTP binding activity towards, but not below, baseline (the level of GTP bound by membranes in this assay in the absence of added CP55,940 or other agonist and in the further absence of any test compound).
  • CB1 inverse agonists reduce the GTP binding activity of the receptor-containing membranes below baseline. If a test compound that displays antagonist activity does not reduce the GTP binding activity below baseline in the absence of the CB1 agonist, it is characterized as a neutral antagonist.
  • An antagonist test compound that elevates GTP binding activity above baseline in the absence of added CP55,940 in this GTP binding assay is characterized as having partial agonist activity.
  • Preferred CB1 antagonists do not elevate GTP binding activity under such conditions more than 10%, more preferably less than 5% and most preferably less than 2% of the maximal response elicited by the agonist, CP55,940.
  • the GTP binding assay can also be used to determine antagonist selectivity towards CB1 over CB2.
  • Agonist-stimulated GTP binding activity at CB2 is measured as described above for CB1 except that the Sf9 cells are infected with one baculoviral stock directing the expression of hCB2 and three directing the expression of each of the three subunits of a heterotrimeric G-protein.
  • the IC 50 and K i are generated as described above for CB1.
  • Certain CB1 antagonists are insurmountable with regard to the agonist induced GTP ⁇ 35 s binding effect.
  • P2 membranes are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in GTP binding assay buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl 2 , 2 mM EGTA, 10 ⁇ g/ml saponin, 0.1% BSA, 0.1 mM bacitracin, 100 KIU/mL aprotinin, 5 ⁇ M GDP) and added to reaction tubes at a concentration of 10 ⁇ g protein/reaction tube.
  • GTP binding assay buffer 50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl 2 , 2 mM EGTA, 10 ⁇ g/ml saponin, 0.1% BSA, 0.1 mM bacitracin, 100 KIU/mL aprotinin, 5 ⁇ M GDP
  • Agonist dose-response curves (typically CP55,940) at concentrations ranging from 10 ⁇ 12 M to 10 ⁇ 5 M, are run either in the absence or in the presence of a test compound at one of several doses up to 100 ⁇ the IC 50 of the test compound as measured in the competition GTP ⁇ 35 S binding.
  • the reactions are initiated by the addition of 100 pM GTP ⁇ 35 S to yield a final volume of 0.25 mL. Following a 90-minute incubation at room temperature, the reactions are terminated by vacuum filtration over GF/C filters (pre-soaked in wash buffer, 0.1% BSA) followed by washing with ice-cold wash buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.0, 120 mM NaCl).
  • the amount of receptor-bound (and thereby membrane-bound) GTP ⁇ 35 S is determined by measuring the bound radioactivity, preferably by liquid scintillation spectrometry of the washed filters. Non-specific binding is determined using 10 ⁇ M GTP ⁇ S and typically represents less than 5 percent of total binding. Data is expressed as percent above basal (baseline). The results of these GTP binding experiments may be conveniently analyzed using SIGMAPLOT software.
  • a surmountable test compound is one which shifts the EC 50 of the agonist to the right (weaker) without affecting the maximum functional response of the agonist. Insurmountable antagonist test compounds have no significant effect on the hCB1 agonist EC 50 at concentrations roughly 100 ⁇ the IC 50 , but significantly reduce or eliminate the agonist stimulated GTP ⁇ 35 S binding response of the receptor.
  • This Example illustrates the evaluation of compound toxicity using a Madin Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cell cytotoxicity assay.
  • test compound 1 ⁇ L is added to each well of a clear bottom 96-well plate (Packard, Meriden, Conn.) to give final concentration of compound in the assay of 10 ⁇ M, 100 ⁇ M or 200 ⁇ M. Solvent without test compound is added to control wells.
  • MDCK cells ATCC no. CCL-34 (American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va.), are maintained in sterile conditions following the instructions in the ATCC production information sheet.
  • Confluent MDCK cells are trypsinized, harvested, and diluted to a concentration of 0.1 ⁇ 10 6 cells/mL with warm (37° C.) medium (VITACELL Minimum Essential Medium Eagle, ATCC catalog # 30-2003). 100 ⁇ L of diluted cells is added to each well, except for five standard curve control wells that contain 100 ⁇ L of warm medium without cells. The plate is then incubated at 37° C. under 95% O 2 , 5% CO 2 for 2 hours with constant shaking.
  • mammalian cell lysis solution from the Packard (Meriden, Conn.) ATP-LITE-M Luminescent ATP detection kit
  • PACKARD TOPSEAL stickers from the Packard (Meriden, Conn.) ATP-LITE-M Luminescent ATP detection kit
  • the ATP-LITE-M Luminescent ATP detection kit is generally used according to the manufacturer's instructions to measure ATP production in treated and untreated MDCK cells. PACKARD ATP LITE-M reagents are allowed to equilibrate to room temperature. Once equilibrated, the lyophilized substrate solution is reconstituted in 5.5 mL of substrate buffer solution (from kit). Lyophilized ATP standard solution is reconstituted in deionized water to give a 10 mM stock.
  • PACKARD substrate solution 50 ⁇ L is added to all wells, which are then covered, and the plates are shaken at approximately 700 rpm on a suitable shaker for 2 min.
  • a white PACKARD sticker is attached to the bottom of each plate and samples are dark adapted by wrapping plates in foil and placing in the dark for 10 min. Luminescence is then measured at 22° C.
  • ATP levels in cells treated with test compound(s) are compared to the levels determined for untreated cells.
  • Cells treated with 10 ⁇ M of a preferred test compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80%, preferably at least 90%, of the untreated cells.
  • ATP levels are at least 50%, preferably at least 80%, of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • LENGTHY TABLE The patent application contains a lengthy table section.

Abstract

Compounds of Formula I are provided.
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00001
 In which the variables are as described herein. Such compounds may be used to modulate CB1 activity in vivo or in vitro, and are particularly useful in the treatment of conditions responsive to CB1 modulation in humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock animals, including appetite disorders, obesity and addictive disorders. Pharmaceutical compositions and methods for using them to treat such disorders are provided, as are methods for using such ligands for receptor localization studies and various in vitro assays.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • This invention relates generally to substituted heteroaryl compounds, and to the use of such compounds to treat conditions responsive to cannabinoid receptor-1 (CB1) activation. The invention further relates to the use of such compounds as reagents for the identification of other agents that bind to CB1, and as probes for the detection and localization of CB1.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Obesity is the most common nutritional problem in developed countries. This condition is often both harmful and costly, as it increases the likelihood of developing serious health conditions (such as cardiovascular diseases and diabetes) and complicates numerous chronic conditions such as respiratory diseases, osteoarthritis, osteoporosis, gall bladder disease and dyslipidernias. Fortunately, however, many of the conditions caused or exacerbated by obesity can be resolved or dramatically improved by weight loss.
  • Once considered merely a behavioral problem (i.e., the result of voluntary hyperphagia), obesity is now recognized as a complex multifactorial disease involving defective regulation of food intake, food-induced energy expenditure and the balance between lipid and lean body anabolism. Both environmental and genetic factors play a role in the development of obesity. As a result, treatment programs that focus entirely on behavior modification have limited efficacy and are associated with recidivism rates exceeding 95%. Pharmacotherapy is now seen as a critical component of weight loss and subsequent weight management.
  • Currently available prescription drugs for managing obesity generally reduce weight by inducing satiety or decreasing dietary fat absorption. Such drugs, however, often have unacceptable side effects. Several, such as the older weight-loss drugs (e.g., amphetamine, methamphetamine, and phenmetrazine, are no longer recommended because of the risk of their abuse. Fenfluramine and dexfenfluramine, both serotonergic agents used to regulate appetite, are also no longer available for use.
  • Thus, there exists a need for more effective agents for promoting weight loss and for reducing or preventing weight-gain. In addition, there exists an unmet need for more effective agents for the treatment of alcohol and tobacco dependence. The present invention fulfills this need, and provides further related advantages.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists that satisfy Formula I:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00002
    or are a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or ester of such a compound.
    Within Formula I:
    • A, B and C are independently optionally substituted carbon (e.g., CR1) or nitrogen, such that at least one of A, B and C is nitrogen;
    • Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 10-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
      Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00003
      in which the N is directly bonded to the aromatic ring that comprises A, B and C, and the S is bonded to “Y”);
    • Y is a single covalent bond or C1-C4alkylene that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from RB;
    • Z is hydrogen,
      Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00004
      wherein m is 0, 1 or 2;
    • Each RA is independently chosen from:
      • (i) halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and —COOH; and
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C1-C4alkoxy; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • or two RA groups attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms are taken together to form a fused 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • Each RB is:
      • (i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, oxo, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • or two RB are taken together to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • Each RD is independently chosen from:
      • (i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl and aminosulfonyl; and
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkenyl, C1-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • Each RE is independently chosen from oxo, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl;
    • Each R1 is independently:
      • (i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) if located at the A or C position, taken together with R2 or R9 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • R2 is:
      • (i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
      • (iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; or
      • (iv) taken together with R1 at the A or C position to form an optionally substituted, fused, 5- to 8-membered heterocycle;
    • R3 is:
      • (i) hydrogen;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)-C(═O)—, phenylC0-C4alkyl, or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R4 is:
      • (i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R5, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R5 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, cyano or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from phenyl and RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R4 to form an optionally substituted 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • R6 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R7 and R8 are independently:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from phenyl and RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R6 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle;
    • or R7 and R8 are taken together to form a 4- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R9 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano or amino;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C8alkylamino, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
      • (iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form an optionally substituted 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle; or
      • (iv) taken together with R1 at the A position to form an optionally substituted, fused 5- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle; and
    • R10 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano or amino; or
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C8alkylamino, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE.
  • In certain aspects, substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula II are provided:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00005
    Within Formula II:
    • A is CR1 or N;
    • Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 10-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
      • such that at least one of Ar1 and Ar2 is an optionally substituted 5- or 6-membered heterocycle;
    • Y is C1-C4alkylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with one or two substituents independently chosen from RB;
    • Z is O(R3), S(O)m(R4), N(R4)(R5), S(O)mN(R4)(R5), C(R6)(R7) or C(R6)(R7)(R8); wherein m is 0, 1 or 2;
    • Each RB is:
      • (i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; such that if RB forms a heterocycloalkyl with R3, then the heterocycloalkyl is not substituted with C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl;
    • or two RB are taken together to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • R1 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, —COOH or aminosulfonyl; or
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2 or R9 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • R2 is:
      • (i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
      • (iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; or
      • (iv) taken together with R1 to form an optionally substituted fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle;
    • R3 is:
      • (i) hydrogen;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)-C(═O)—, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, amino, C1-C6alkyl or C1-C6alkoxy; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R4 is:
      • (i) hydrogen;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2, R5, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R5 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, cyano or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, —COOH, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycle, and phenyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R4 to form an optionally substituted 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • R7 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE; such that R7 is not C1-C6hydroxyalkyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R6 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle;
    • R8 is:
      • (i) halogen, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R6 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle;
    • R10 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano or amino; or
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C8alkylamino, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; and
    • X, R6, R9, R10 and each RA, RD and RE are as described for Formula I.
  • In certain aspects, substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula III are provided:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00006
    Within Formula III:
    • Z is O(R3), S(O)m(R4), N(R4)(R5), S(O)mN(R4)(R5) or C(R6)(R7)(R8); wherein m is 0, 1 or 2; such that Z is not amino or dimethylamino if X and Y are both —CH2—;
    • Each RB is:
      • (i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl); or
      • (ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; such that if RB forms a heterocycloalkyl with R3, then the heterocycloalkyl is not substituted with C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl;
    • or two RB are taken together to form an optionally substituted C3-C8cycloalkyl or 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • R1 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl; or
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano and amino; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2 or R9 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • R3 is:
      • (i) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)-C(═O)—, or phenylC0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, amino, C1-C6alkyl or C1-C6alkoxy; or
      • (ii) taken together with R2, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R4 is:
      • (i) hydrogen;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, oxo, hydroxy, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, such that R4 is not C1-C8alkyl that is substituted with COOH or C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl;
      • (iii) taken together with R2, R5, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R5 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, cyano or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, oxo, hydroxy, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkylC1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycle, and phenyl, such that R5 is not C1-C8alkyl that is substituted with COOH or C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R4 to form an optionally substituted 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • R6 is taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered cycloalkyl or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • X, R9, R10, Ar1, Ar2, and each RA, RD and RE are as described for Formula I; and
    • Y, R2, R7 and R8 are as described for Formula II.
  • Within further aspects, substituted heteroaryl CB 1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula IV are provided:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00007
    Within Formula IV:
    • A is CR1 or N;
    • Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 10-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is substituted with from 1 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA; such that at least one of Ar1 and Ar2 is substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl;
    • Ar4 is phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocycle, each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RA;
    • such that at least one of Ar1, Ar2 and Ar4 is a heterocycle;
    • X is O, N(R2) or SOmN(R2);
    • R1 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • R2 is:
      • (i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R1 to form an optionally substituted fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle;
    • n is 1, 2 or 3; and
    • Each RA and RE is as described for Formula I.
  • The present invention further provides, within other aspects, substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula V:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00008
    Within Formula V:
    • Ar2 is a 5- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
    • X is O, N(R2) or SOmN(R2);
    • Y is as described for Formula II;
    • Z and each RA and RE are as described for Formula I;
    • Each RB is:
      • (i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (ii) taken together with R3 or R4 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; such that if RB forms a heterocycloalkyl with R3, then the heterocycloalkyl is not substituted with C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl;
    • Each RD is independently chosen from:
      • (i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl and aminosulfonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkenyl, C1-C6alkynyl, C3-C8cycloalkylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE; and
      • (iii) taken together with R5 to form a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • R1 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, cyano, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl; or
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
    • R2, if present, is taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R3 is:
      • (i) hydrogen;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C1-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)-C(═O)—, or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, C1-C6alkyl or C1-C6alkoxy; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2 or RB to form a 4- to 8-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R4 is:
      • (i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2, R5, or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R5 is:
      • (i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, —COOH, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl and phenyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R4 or RD to form an optionally substituted 4- to 8-membered heterocycle;
    • R6 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8, or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R7 and R8 are independently:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
      • (iii) taken together with R6 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle; or
      • (iv) R7 and R8 taken together form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle; and
    • R16 is chloro, fluoro or C1-C3alkyl.
  • In still further aspects, the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula VI:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00009
    Within Formula VI:
    • A, B and C are independently chosen from nitrogen and CR1, such that exactly one of A, B and C is nitrogen;
    • Ar1 is a 5- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 1 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
    • Ar2 is a 5- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
    • Y is as described for Formula II;
    • Z, R2, R5, and each RA, RD and RE is as described for Formula I;
    • Each RB is:
      • (i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • or two RB are taken together to form an optionally substituted C3-C8cycloalkyl or a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • Each R1 is independently:
      • (i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) if located at the A or C position, taken together with R2 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • R3 is:
      • (i) hydrogen;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)-C(═O)—, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R4 is:
      • (i) hydrogen;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R5 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • R6 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; and
    • R7 and R8, are independently:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from phenyl and RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R6 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle;
    • or R7 and R8 are taken together to form a 4- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD.
  • Within other aspects, the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I that further satisfy Formula VII:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00010
    Within Formula VII:
    • Y, R2, R4, Ar1 and Ar2 are as described for Formula II;
    • X is O, N(R2) or SOmN(R2);
    • Z, R3, R5, R6, and each RA and RD and RE are as described for Formula I;
    • Each RB is:
      • (i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
    • or two RB are taken together to form an optionally substituted C3-C8cycloalkyl or a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • R1 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl;
      • (ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
      • (iii) taken together with R2 or R9 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is optionally substituted, and is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
    • R7 is:
      • (i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE; such that R7 is not C1-C6hydroxyalkyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R6 or R8 to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl or heterocycle;
    • R8 is:
      • (i) halogen, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
      • (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
      • (iii) taken together with R6 or R7 to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl or heterocycle.
  • Within certain aspects, substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formula I, and other Formulas provided herein, exhibit a Ki of no greater than 2 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar in a CB1 ligand binding assay and/or have an IC50 value of no greater than 2 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar, 100 nanomolar, 50 nanomolar or 10 nanomolar in an assay for determination of CB1 antagonist activity.
  • In certain embodiments, substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity.
  • Within certain aspects, compounds as described herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
  • The present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described herein in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • The present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound as described herein. Such conditions include, for example, appetite disorders, obesity, dependency disorders such as alcohol dependency and nicotine dependency, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, memory disorders, cognitive disorders, movement disorders, metabolic disorders and bone loss.
  • In further aspects, methods are provided for suppressing appetite in a patient, comprising administering to the patient an appetite reducing amount of at least one substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described herein.
  • The present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions, comprising (a) a first agent that is a substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described above, (b) a second agent that is suitable for treating an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder or bone loss; and (c) a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • The present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a composition comprising a substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described above in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to treat one or more conditions responsive to CB1 modulation.
  • Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of CB1 in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonist as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to CB1; and (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound bound to CB1.
  • In yet another aspect, the invention provides methods of preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
  • These and other aspects of the present invention will become apparent upon reference to the following detailed description.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • As noted above, the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists. Such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo in a variety of contexts as described herein.
  • Terminology
  • Compounds are generally described herein using standard nomenclature. For compounds having asymmetric centers, it should be understood that (unless otherwise specified) all of the optical isomers and mixtures thereof are encompassed. In addition, compounds with carbon-carbon double bonds may occur in Z- and E- forms, with all isomeric forms of the compounds being included in the present invention unless otherwise specified. If a compound exists in various tautomeric forms, a recited compound is not limited to any one specific tautomer, but rather is intended to encompass all tautomeric forms. Certain compounds are described herein using a general formula that includes variables (e.g., X, A, Ar1). Unless otherwise specified, each variable within such a formula is defined independently of any other variable, and any variable that occurs more than one time in a formula is defined independently at each occurrence.
  • The term “substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists” encompasses all compounds of Formula I, and includes pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates and esters of such compounds. It will be apparent that, unless otherwise specified herein, such formulas encompass compounds in which one or both of Ar1 and Ar2 is a heterocycle, as well as compounds in which neither Ar1 nor Ar2 is a heterocycle. Compounds in which neither, one or both of Ar1 and Ar2 is aromatic are also encompassed.
  • A “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication. Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids. Specific pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, salts of acids such as hydrochloric, phosphoric, hydrobromic, malic, glycolic, fumaric, sulfuric, sulfamic, sulfanilic, formic, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, benzene sulfonic, ethane disulfonic, 2-hydroxyethylsulfonic, nitric, benzoic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, citric, tartaric, lactic, stearic, salicylic, glutamic, ascorbic, pamoic, succinic, fumaric, maleic, propionic, hydroxymaleic, hydroiodic, phenylacetic, alkanoic such as acetic, HOOC—(CH2)n—COOH where n is 0-4, and the like. Similarly, pharmaceutically acceptable cations include, but are not limited to sodium, potassium, calcium, aluminum, lithium and ammonium. Those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize further pharmaceutically acceptable salts for the compounds provided herein, including those listed by Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th ed., Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., p. 1418 (1985). In general, a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method. Briefly, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
  • It will be apparent that each compound provided herein may, but need not, be formulated as a solvate (e.g., a hydrate) or non-covalent complex. In addition, the various crystal forms and polymorphs are within the scope of the present invention. Also provided herein are prodrugs of the compounds provided herein. A “prodrug” is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound provided herein. For example, a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of a compound as provided herein. Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate, phosphate and benzoate derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within the compounds provided herein. Prodrugs of the compounds provided herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds.
  • As used herein, the term “alkyl” refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (C1-C8alkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (C1-C6alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (C1-C4alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl or 3-methylpentyl. “C0-C4alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond (C0) or an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms; “C0-C6alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C1-C6alkylene group; “C0-C8alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a C1-C8alkylene group. In certain instances, a substituent of an alkyl group is indicated, as in the term “C1-C4hydroxyalkyl,” which refers to a C1-C4alkyl group that is substituted with one or more hydroxy groups, and “C1-C4aminoalkyl,” which refers to a C1-C4alkyl group that is substituted with one or more —NH2 groups.
  • “Alkylene” refers to a divalent alkyl group, as defined above. C1-C4alkylene is an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or 4 carbon atoms.
  • “Alkenyl” refers to straight or branched chain alkene groups, which comprise at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C6alkenyl and C2-C4alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. “Alkynyl” refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond. Alkynyl groups include C2-C8alkynyl, C2-C6alkynyl and C2-C4alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • A “cycloalkyl” is a saturated or partially saturated cyclic group in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl, as well as partially saturated variants thereof. Certain cycloalkyl groups are C3-C8cycloalkyl, in which the ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members, all of which are carbon. A “(C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl” is a C3-C8cycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkylene group.
  • By “alkoxy,” as used herein, is meant an alkyl group attached via an oxygen bridge. Alkoxy groups include C1-C6alkoxy and C1-C4alkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2-pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3-methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups.
  • “Alkylthio” refers to an alkyl group as described above attached via a sulfur bridge.
  • “Alkylsulfinyl” refers to groups of the formula —(SO)-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfinyl groups include C1-C6alkylsulfinyl and C1-C4alkylsulfinyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • “Alkylsulfonyl” refers to groups of the formula —SO2-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include C1-C6alkylsulfonyl and C1-C4alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. “C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl” is an alkylsulfonyl group of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms that is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonyl). “C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl” is a C1-C6alkylsulfonyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkylene group. “(C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl” refers to groups of the formula —(SO2)—(C3-C8cycloalkyl), in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment.
  • The term “alkanoyl” refers to an acyl group (e.g., —C═O)alkyl), where attachment is through the carbon of the keto group. Alkanoyl groups include C2-C8alkanoyl, C2-C6alkanoyl and C2-C4alkanoyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. “C1alkanoyl” refers to —C═O)H, which (along with C2-C8alkanoyl) is encompassed by the term “C1-C8alkanoyl.” Ethanoyl is C2alkanoyl. A “haloalkanoyl” group (e.g., C1-C2haloalkanoyl) is an alkanoyl group in which one or more hydrogens on the alkyl portion is replaced with the corresponding number of independently chosen halogens.
  • An “alkanone” is a ketone group in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement. “C3-C8alkanone,” “C3-C6alkanone” and “C3-C4alkanone” refer to an alkanone having from 3 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. A C3 alkanone has the structure —CH2—C═O—CH3.
  • Similarly, “alkyl ether” refers to a linear or branched ether substituent. Alkyl ether groups include C2-C8alkyl ether, C2-C6alkyl ether and C2-C4alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. A C2 alkyl ether has the structure —CH2—O—CH3.
  • The term “alkoxycarbonyl” refers to an alkoxy group linked via a carbonyl (i.e., a group having the general structure —C(═O)—O-alkyl). Alkoxycarbonyl groups include C1-C8, C1-C6 and C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group. “C1alkoxycarbonyl” refers to —C(═O)—O—CH3.
  • “Alkanoyloxy,” as used herein, refers to an alkanoyl group linked via an oxygen bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure —C(═O)-alkyl). Alkanoyloxy groups include C2-C8, C2-C6 and C2-C4alkanoyloxy groups, which have from 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. “C2alkanoyloxy” refers to —C(═O)—O—CH3.
  • “Alkylamino” refers to a secondary or tertiary amine that has the general structure —NH-alkyl or —N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups. Such groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)amino groups, in which each C1-C8alkyl may be the same or different, as well as mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino groups and mono- and di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino groups.
  • “Alkylaminoalkyl” refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkylene group (i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene-N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups. Alkylaminoalkyl groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)aminoC1-C8alkyl, mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C6alkyl and mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl. “Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C6alkyl” refers to a mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino group linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C6alkylene group. The following are representative alkylaminoalkyl groups:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00011
    It will be apparent that the definition of “alkyl” as used in the terms “alkylamino” and “alkylaminoalkyl” differs from the definition of “alkyl” used for all other alkyl-containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl).
  • The term “aminocarbonyl” refers to an amide group (i.e., —C(═O)NH2). “Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl” refers to an aminocarbonyl group in which one or both hydrogens are replaced with an independently selected C1-C6alkyl group, and which is linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkylene group.
  • The term “aminosulfonyl” refers to a sulfonamide group (i.e., —SO2NH2). “Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl” refers to an aminosulfonyl group in which one or both hydrogens are replaced with an independently selected C1-C6alkyl group, and which is linked via a single covalent bond or a C1-C4alkylene group.
  • The term “halogen” refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • A “haloalkyl” is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more independently chosen halogens (e.g., “C1-C8haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 8 carbon atoms; “C1-C6haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples of haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-1-trifluoromethyl-ethyl. Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl. The term “haloalkoxy” refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above attached via an oxygen bridge. “C1-C8haloalkoxy” groups have 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • A dash (“—”) that is not between two letters or numbers is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent. For example, —C(═O)NH2 is attached through the carbon atom.
  • A “carbocycle” has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, each of which has only carbon ring members. Typically, a carbocycle that has a single ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members (i.e., C3-C8carbocycles); rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members (i.e., C4-C7carbocycles or C5-C7carbocycles) are recited in certain embodiments. Carbocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members. Carbocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated. Unless otherwise specified, a carbocycle may be a cycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated as described above) or an aryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic). Representative aromatic carbocycles are phenyl, naphthyl and biphenyl. In certain embodiments preferred carbocycles have a single ring, such as phenyl and C3-C8cycloalkyl groups.
  • A “heterocycle” (also referred to herein as a “heterocyclic group”) has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom independently chosen from oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring. Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members. Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO2. Heterocycles may be optionally substituted with a variety of substituents, as indicated. Certain heterocycles are 4- to 10-membered or 5- to 10-membered, which comprise one or two rings—in certain embodiments, such heterocycles are monocyclic (e.g., 4- to 8-membered, 5- to 8-membered, 5- to 7-membered, or 5- or 6-membered); in other embodiments, such heterocycles are 9- or 10-membered bicyclic heterocycles.
  • Certain heterocycles are heteroaryl groups (i.e., at least one heterocyclic ring within the group is aromatic), such as a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl (which may be monocyclic or bicyclic) or a 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., pyridyl or pyrimidyl). Other heterocycles are heterocycloalkyl groups. Certain heterocycles may be linked by a single covalent bond or via an alkylene group, as indicated, for example, by the terms “(6-membered heteroarylC0-C4alkyl” and “(4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl.” Any heterocycle may, but need not, be bridged. A heterocycle that is “bridged” comprises an alkylene (e.g., methylene or ethylene) link between non-adjacent ring atoms (typically carbon atoms). The following are representative bridged heterocycles:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00012
    An unbridged ring lacks a link between non-adjacent ring atoms.
  • A “substituent,” as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest. For example, a “ring substituent” may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group discussed herein that is covalently bonded to an atom (such as a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member. The term “substitution” refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent as described above, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
  • Groups that are “optionally substituted” are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different). Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase “substituted with from 0 to X substituents,” where X is the maximum number of possible substituents. Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substitutents).
  • “CB1,” as used herein, refers to the human cannabinoid receptor reported by Hoeche et al. (1991) New Biol. 3(9):880-85, as well as allelic variants thereof and homologues thereof found in other species.
  • A “CB1 antagonist” is a compound that detectably inhibits signal transduction mediated by CB1. Such inhibition may be determined using the representative agonist-induced GTP binding assay provided in Example 64. Preferred CB1 antagonists have an IC50 of 2 μM or less in this assay, more preferably 1 μM or less, and still more preferably 500 nM or less or 100 nM or less. In certain embodiments, the CB1 antagonist is specific for CB1 (i.e., the IC50 value in a similar assay performed using the predominantly peripheral cannabinoid receptor CB2 is greater than 2 μM and/or the IC50 ratio (CB2/CB1) is at least 10, preferably 100, and more preferably at least 1000). CB1 antagonists preferably have minimal agonist activity (i.e., induce an increase in the basal activity of CB1 that is less than 5% of the increase that would be induced by one EC50 of the agonist CP55,940, and more preferably have no detectable agonist activity within the assay described in Example 64). CB1 antagonists for use as described herein are generally non-toxic. CB1 antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists.
  • A “neutral antagonist” of CB1 is a compound that inhibits the activity of CB1 agonist (e.g., endocannabinoids) at CB1, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a GTP binding assay as described in Example 64 performed in the absence of agonist, CB1 activity is reduced by no more than 10%, more preferably by no more than 5%, and even more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity). Neutral antagonists may, but need not, also inhibit the binding of agonist to CB1.
  • An “inverse agonist” of CB1 is a compound that reduces the activity of CB1 below its basal activity level in the absence of activating concentrations of agonist. Inverse agonists may also inhibit the activity of agonist at CB1, and/or may inhibit binding of CB1 agonist to CB1. The ability of a compound to inhibit the binding of CB1 agonists to the CB1 receptor may be measured by a binding assay, such as the radioligand binding assay given in Example 63. The reduction in basal activity of CB1 produced by an inverse agonist may be determined from a GTP binding assay, such as the assay of Example 64.
  • A “non-competitive CB1 antagonist” is a CB1 antagonist that (1) does not detectably inhibit binding of CB1 agonist (e.g., CP55,940) to CB1 at antagonist concentrations up to 10 μM and (2) reduces the maximal functional response elicited by agonist. Compounds that satisfy these two conditions may be identified using the assays provided herein. Such compounds generally do not display detectable activity in the competition binding assay described in Example 63. In functional assays, a non-competitive antagonist concentration-dependently reduces the maximal functional response elicited by agonist without altering agonist EC50. The suppression of functional activity by a non-competitive antagonist cannot be overcome by increasing agonist concentrations (i.e., the antagonist activity is insurmountable).
  • A “therapeutically effective amount” (or dose) is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from a condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including the alleviation of one or more symptoms of dependency or an appetite disorder, or the promotion of weight loss. In the case of appetite suppression, a therapeutically effective amount is sufficient to decrease patient appetite, as assessed using patient reporting or actual food intake. Such an amount is referred to herein as an “appetite reducing amount.” A therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to result in detectable alteration in CB1-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided herein). The discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically, effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
  • A “patient” is any individual treated with a compound as provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to CB1 modulation or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered to be at risk for the development of such symptoms).
  • Substituted Heteroaryl CB1 Antagonists
  • As noted above, the present invention provides substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of appetite disorders, obesity and addictive disorders. Such compounds may also be used within in vitro assays (e.g., assays for CB1 activity), as probes for detection and localization of CB1 and within assays to identify other CB1 antagonists, including non-competitive CB1 antagonists.
  • Within certain substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formulas I-VII, variables are as follows:
  • A, B and C
  • In certain substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formulas I and VI, the variable “C” is N. Within certain such compounds of Formula I, A is CR1, and B is N; in other such compounds, A is N and B is CR1; and in still further compounds, A and B are both N; or A and B are both CR1. Accordingly, Formula I (and, unless otherwise specified, other formulas recited herein) encompasses compounds with any of the following core structures:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00013
  • In further substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of Formulas I and VI, the variable “C” is CR1. Accordingly, Formula I (and, unless otherwise specified, other formulas provided herein) encompasses compounds with any of the following core structures:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00014
    Representative R1 groups include, for example, (i) hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- and di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl; and (ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; in certain embodiments, each R1 is hydrogen, bromo, chloro, cyano, amino, methyl, ethyl, methylamino or ethylamino; in further such embodiments, each R1 is hydrogen, bromo, chloro, cyano, methyl or ethyl.
  • In certain pyridines of Formula VI, C is nitrogen and B is CH or carbon substituted with halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy or C1-C6haloalkoxy.
  • R1 groups at the “A” or “C” position may alternatively be taken together with R2 or R9 to form a fused carbocycle or heterocycle, each of which is optionally substituted. Certain such compounds satisfy Formula VIII or Formula VIIIa:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00015
    wherein:
    • q is 0 or 1;
    • D is O, S, SO, SO2, NH or CH2;
    • R15 represents from 0 to 3 substituents that are preferably independently chosen from oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl;
    • And the remaining variables are as described above.
      Ar1 and Ar2
  • In certain substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists provided herein, Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 7-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA, as described above. Within certain embodiments, at least one of Ar1 and Ar2 is aromatic; in further embodiments, at least one of Ar1 and Ar2 is a heterocycle.
  • Representative Ar1 groups include phenyl and pyridyl (e.g., pyridin-4-yl), each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents (e.g., 0, 1, 2 or 3 substituents) or with 1 or 2 substitutents independently chosen from halogen (e.g., chloro, bromo or fluoro), cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl. Certain such Ar1 groups are substituted with one or two halogens (e.g., 2-chloro-pyridin-4-yl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl or 2,4-dichlorophenyl).
  • Additional representative Ar1 groups include cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexyl) and heterocycloalkyl groups (e.g., a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl group, such as piperazinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl), each of which is optionally substituted as described above, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from halogen (e.g., chloro, bromo or fluoro), cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl. In certain such compounds, Ar1 is morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • Representative Ar2 groups include phenyl, pyrrolyl and pyridyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents (e.g., 1 or 2 substituents) independently chosen from (i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl; and (ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl. Certain such Ar2 groups are substituted with one or more halogens (e.g., 2-chloro-pyridin-4-yl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl or 2,4-dichlorophenyl). In certain compounds, both Ar1 and Ar2 are both 4-fluorophenyl or 4-chlorophenyl.
  • Additional representative Ar2 groups include cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexyl) and heterocycloalkyl groups, such as a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl (e.g., piperazinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl), each of which is optionally substituted (i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl; and (ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl. In certain such compounds, Ar2 is morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl, each of which is optionally substituted.
  • X, Y and Z
  • In certain substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of the Formulas described above, X is N(R2), X is C(R9)(R10), or X is O. Certain such compounds satisfy one of the following Subformulas A-EJ:
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00016
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00017
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00018
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00019
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00020
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00021
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00022
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00023
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00024
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00025
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00026
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00027
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00028
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00029
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00030
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00031
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00032
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00033
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00034
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00035
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00036
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00037
  • Within the above Subformulas A-EJ, variables are as defined above for any of Formulas I-VII, except as follows:
    • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-P00001
      represents a single or double bond.
    • E, F and G are independently chosen from N and CR14.
    • Q is NR5, O or SOm, wherein m is 0, 1 or 2; in certain embodiments Q is SO2, SO, S, O or NH.
    • Z is O(R3) or N(R4)(R5); in certain embodiments, Z is C1-C6alkoxy or (C1-C6alkoxy)C1-C6alkoxy.
    • Each n is independently 0, 1 or 2; in certain embodiments at least one n is not 0.
    • p is 0 or 1.
    • r is 1,2, 3 or 4.
    • R2 is hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl or C1-C6alkanoyl. In certain compounds, R2 is hydrogen, C1-C6alkyl or C1-C6alkanoyl. In other such compounds, R2 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl.
    • R3 is: (i) hydrogen; or (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl or (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl. In certain compounds, R3 is hydrogen or C1-C4alkyl.
    • R4 is: (i) hydrogen; or (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl.
    • R5 is: (i) hydrogen, cyano or aminocarbonyl; or (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl. In certain compounds, R5 is (i) hydrogen or cyano; or (ii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, C1-C6alkyl, aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino.
    • R11 represents 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from oxo, COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and groups that are taken together with R5 to form a 5- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl; or R11 represents two substituents that are taken together to form a C1-C2alkylene bridge. In certain embodiments, R11 represents 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from oxo, COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl and mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl.
      With regard to R12 and R13:
    • R12 is hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C2-C4alkyl ether, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, hydroxy, C1-C4alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and
    • R13 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C2-C4alkyl ether and C1-C4alkanoyl; or
    • R12 and R13 are taken together to form a fused or spiro 5- to 7-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4hydroxyalkyl.
    • Each R14 is independently chosen from hydroxy, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4carboxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl.
    • R16 is chloro, fluoro or methyl.
    • R17 is: (i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl or C1-C4alkanoyl; or (ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
    • R18 is absent or represents one substituent chosen from chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, or C1-C4haloalkoxy.
    • One of R20 and R21 is taken together with R22 or R23 to form a methylene or ethylene bridge, and those variables designated R20, R21, R22 and R23 that do not form bridge are hydrogen. In certain such compounds, the group designated:
      Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00038
    • R25 is: (i) hydrogen; or (ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl. In certain embodiments, R25 is other than hydrogen.
      Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00039
      is a 4- to 8-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 5 substituents independently chosen from (i) oxo, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and (ii) pyridyl, pyrimidyl and phenyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4haloalkyl.
      Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00040
      is a 4- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, cyano, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy and C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl. In certain embodiments,
      Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00041
      is phenyl or pyridyl. In further embodiments,
      Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00042
      is a heterocycle that is optionally substituted as indicated above.
    • Ar3 is a 5-membered heteroaryl that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4carboxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl.
  • Within certain substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists of the Formulas and Subformulas provided herein, variables satisfy one or more of the following limitations:
    • (i) At least one of Ar1 and Ar2 is phenyl, naphthyl or a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
    • (ii) Ar1 and/or Ar2 is not phenyl;
    • (iii) Ar1 and Ar2 are 4-fluorophenyl or Ar1 and Ar2 are 4-chlorophenyl;
    • (iv) Ar1 is 2-chloro-pyridin-4-yl;
    • (v) Ar1 and/or Ar2 is naphthyl or a 9- or 10-membered bicyclic heterocycle;
    • (vi) X is O or N(R2);
    • (vii) X is C(R9)(R10), Z is N(R4)(R5) and R9 and R4 are taken together to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
    • (viii) Z is not hydrogen;
    • (ix) One RA is a heterocycle linked via a single bond or a methylene;
    • (x) R1 is hydrogen, bromo, chloro, cyano, amino, methyl, ethyl, methylamino or ethylamino.
    • (xi) R2 is hydrogen or C1-C6alkyl.
    • (xii) R1 or R2 is aminocarbonyl, mono or dialkylaminocarbonyl or a heterocycloalkyl linked via an amide linkage;
    • (xiii) R1 and R2 together form a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl that is optionally substituted with alkyl, oxo or alkoxy;
    • (xiv) R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkyl ether, aminocarbonyl, mono or dialkylaminocarbonyl, mono or dialkylamino or taken together with R5 or R6 to form a carbocycle or heterocycle;
    • (xv) R2 and R4 together form a bridged heterocycle;
    • (xvi) R3 is not heterocycloalkyl or phenyl;
    • (xvii) R4 is taken together with R2 and R5 to form a fused bicyclic heterocycle;
    • (xviii) R9 and R4 together form a bridged carbocycle or heterocycle;
    • (xix) R6 forms a ring with R2 or RB;
    • (xx) at least one of R6, R7 and R8 is not hydrogen;
    • (xxi) R7 is hydrogen or aminocarbonyl, and R8 is mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino or C1-C6alkanoylamino.
    • (xxii) R7 and R8 are taken together to form an optionally substituted 5- to 7-membered heterocycle.
    • (xxiii) Y is C1-C4alkylene that is optionally substituted with RB;
    • (xiv) Y is C1-C4alkylene that is optionally substituted with C1-C4alkyl; and/or
    • (xv) B and C are independently N, CH or carbon substituted with halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy or C1-C6haloalkoxy.
  • Representative compounds provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in the Examples below. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
  • As noted above, compounds provided herein are CB1 antagonists. Certain such compounds are non-competitive CB1 antagonists. In addition, or alternatively, certain compounds provided herein display CB1 specificity. CB1 antagonist activity may be confirmed using an agonist-induced GTP binding assay, such as the assay described in Example 64, herein. Such assays employ a CB1-containing cell membrane preparation (e.g., a preparation of membranes of insect cells that recombinantly express CB1) to determine the effect of a test compound on CB1 agonist-induced GTP binding to CB1. Briefly, a first cell membrane preparation comprising CB1 is contacted with: (i) labeled GTP; (ii) a CB1 agonist; and (iii) a test compound to yield a test membrane preparation. Simultaneously, or in either order, a second cell membrane preparation comprising CB1 is contacted with: (i) labeled GTP; and (ii) a CB1 agonist to yield a control membrane preparation. The labeled GTP is preferably GTPγ35S; a representative CB1 agonist is CP55,940. Such contact is performed under conditions that are suitable for GTP binding to CB1, such as the conditions described in Example 64. The concentrations of labeled GTP and CB1 agonist used are generally concentrations that are sufficient to result in a detectable increase in the amount of labeled GTP bound to the membrane preparation in the presence of CB1 agonist. Such concentrations may be determined by routine experimentation; representative suitable concentrations are provided in Example 64. Generally, a range of test compound concentrations is used (e.g., ranging from 10−10 m to 10−5M).
  • After sufficient contact (e.g., incubation) to allow GTP binding to the membrane preparations, a signal that corresponds to (represents) the amount of bound, labeled GTP is detected (typically, unbound labeled GTP is first removed via a washing step). In other words, simultaneously or in either order: (i) a test signal that represents an amount of bound, labeled GTP in the test membrane preparation is detected; and (ii) a control signal that represents an amount of bound, labeled GTP in the control membrane preparation is detected. The nature of the signal detected is determined by the type of label used. For example, if the GTP is radioactively labeled, the signal detected is radioactive decay (e.g., via liquid scintillation spectrometry). The CB1 antagonist activity of the test compound is then determined by comparing the test signal with the control signal. A test signal that is lower than the control signal indicates that the test compound is a CB1 antagonist.
  • In certain embodiments, preferred compounds are cannabinoid receptor-specific. This means that they only bind to, activate, or inhibit the activity of certain receptors other than cannabinoid receptors (preferably other than CB1) with affinity constants of greater than 100 nanomolar, preferably greater than 1 micromolar, more preferably greater than 4 micromolar. Alternatively, or in addition, such compounds exhibit 200-fold greater affinity for CB1 than for other cellular receptors. Such other non-cannabinoid cellular receptors include histamine receptors, bioactive peptide receptors (including NPY receptors such as NPY Y5), and hormone receptors (e.g., melanin-concentrating hormone receptors). Assays for evaluating binding to such receptors are well known, and include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,566,367, which is incorporated herein by reference for its disclosure of NPY receptor binding assays in Example 676 columns 82-83; and in PCT International Application Publication No. WO 02/094799 which is incorporated herein by reference for its disclosure of an MCH receptor binding assay in Example 2, pages 108-109.
  • Utility of the compounds provided herein for the various diseases and disorders may be demonstrated in animal disease models that are known in the art, such as:
    • Colombo et al. (1998) Life Sciences 63:113-17 and Vickers and Kennett (2005) Curr. Drug. Targets 6:215-23—food intake and weight loss (rats)
    • Simiand et al. (1998) Behavioral Pharm. 9:179-181—sweet food intake (marmosets)
    • Rowland et al. (2001) Psychopharm. 159:111-16—food intake (rats)
    • Arnone et al. (1997) Psychopharm. 132:104-106—sucrose and ethanol intake (mice)
    • Colombo et al. (2004) Eur. J. Pharmacol. 498:119-23—alcohol motivational properties (rats)
    • Serra et al. (2002) Eur. J. Pharmacol. 443:95-97—alcohol deprivation effect (rats)
    • Rubino et al. (2000) Life Sciences 22:2213-29—opiate withdrawal syndrome (rats)
    • Chaperon et al. (1998) Psychopharm. 135:324-32—motor activity, place conditioning (rats)
    • Abraham et al. (1993) J. Clin. Invest. 93:776 and Milne and Piper (1995) Eur. J. Pharmacol. 282:243—bronchial hyperresponsiveness (sheep and guinea pigs)
    • Kadoi et al. (2005) British Journal of Anaesthesia 94(5):563-68—septic shock (rats)
    • Batkai et al. (2001) Nature Medicine 7(7):827-32—vasodilation in liver cirrhosis (rats)
    • Tsusumi et al. (2000) Biol. Pharm. Bull. (Japan) 23(5):657-59—constipation (monkeys)
    • Kapur (2001) J. Pathology 194(3):277-88—chronic intestinal pseudo-obstruction (rodents)
  • If desired, compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred compound is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred compound produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred compound exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.D. dosing, preferably T.I.D. dosing, more preferably B.I.D. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing). In addition, differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable. Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use. For example, assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers. Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously). Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays. Compound half-life is inversely proportional to the frequency of dosage of a compound. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described herein.
  • As noted above, preferred compounds provided herein are nontoxic. In general, the term “nontoxic” as used herein shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans). In addition, a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
  • As used herein, a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 66, herein. In other words, cells treated as described in Example 66 with 100 μM of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • A compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound. In certain preferred embodiments, a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals. By “statistically significant” is meant results varying from control at the p<0.1 level or more preferably at the p<0.05 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
  • A compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC5, or IC50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g. dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally.
  • Similarly, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory rodents by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. Alternatively, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
  • In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
  • Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC50 or IC50 for the compound. In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
  • For detection purposes, as discussed in more detail below, compounds provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled. For example, such compounds may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 11C, 13C, 14C, 15N, 18O, 17O, 31P, 32P, 35S, 18F and 36Cl. In addition, substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., 2H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Preparation of Substituted Heteroaryl CB1 Antagonists
  • Compounds provided herein may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. In general, starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich Corp. (St. Louis, Mo.), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry, or variations thereon appreciated by those skilled in the art. It will be apparent that the reagents and synthetic transformations in the following Schemes can be readily modified to produce additional substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists. Each variable in the following Schemes refers to any group consistent with the description of the compounds provided herein.
  • When a protecting group is required, an optional deprotection step may be employed. Suitable protecting groups and methodology for protection and deprotection, such as those described in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene, are well known. Compounds and intermediates requiring protection/deprotection will be readily apparent.
  • Certain definitions used in the following Schemes and in the Examples include:
    AcOH acetic acid
    BINAP 2,2′-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1′-binaphthyl
    BOC t-butoxycarbonyl
    CDCl3 deuterated chloroform
    DCM dichloromethane
    DMA N,N-dimethylacetamide
    DEAD diethyl azodicarboxylate
    DIEA diisopropylethylamine
    EtOH ethanol
    EtOAc ethyl acetate
    h hour(s)
    1H NMR proton nuclear magnetic resonance
    Hz hertz
    LC-MS liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry
    m-CPBA m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid
    MeOH methanol
    MHz megahertz
    MH+ or (M + 1) mass + 1
    Min minute(s)
    MS mass spectrometry
    n-BuLi N-butyl lithium
    NBS N-bromosuccinimide
    NCS N-chlorosuccinimide
    NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
    δ chemical shift
    Pd(PPh3)4 tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (0)
    Pd2(dba)3 tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0)
    PTLC preparative thin layer chromatography
    rt room temperature
    Rt retention time
    TEA triethylamine
    TFA trifluoroacetic acid
    THF tetrahydrofuran
    TLC thin layer chromatography
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00043
  • Scheme 1 illustrates a method for preparing compounds of Formula I wherein X is NR2. In step 1, dichloropyrazine 1 is reacted with primary or secondary amine in the presence of base and heat to provide 2-amino-6-chloropyrazine 2. Bromination of 2 in step 2 provides 2-amino-5-bromo-6-chloropyrazine 3. Step 3 entails Suzuki cross-coupling with aryl or heteroaryl boronic acid to provide 4. Further reaction of 4 in step 4 with aryl boronic acid under Suzuki cross-coupling conditions provides diarylpyrazine 5 (i.e., compound of Formula I wherein R1 is hydrogen). Diarylpyrazine 5 may be further elaborated in step 5 by bromination to produce tetrasubstituted pyrazine 6. Bromo derivative 6 may be reacted in step 6 with an alkylamine to produce compounds of Formula I wherein R1 is alkylamino (7). Those skilled in the art will recognize that bromine in compound 6 can readily be converted to a variety of other substituents including aryl, alkyl and alkoxy by standard procedures. If desired, a variety of well-known alternative cross-coupling strategies can be employed to introduce Ar1 and Ar2. For example aryl or heteroaryl tin compounds may be employed in the coupling reactions. Alternatively, palladium-catalyzed amination can be conducted in step 3 or step 4 to introduce a saturated heterocycle such as morpholine as Ar1 or Ar2.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00044
  • Scheme 2 illustrates a variation of Scheme 1 wherein the order of steps is modified to introduce Ar1 prior to bromination.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00045
  • Scheme 3 illustrates a method of preparing compounds of Formula I wherein X is oxygen and R1 is cyano. In step 1, diketone 10 is condensed with diaminomaleonitrile 11 under acidic conditions to provide dicyanopyrazine 12. Step 2 entails displacement of one of the cyano groups with alkoxide to produce 13. If Ar1 and Ar2 are not equivalent, step 2 yields a mixture of compounds that must be separated by chromatography. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the cyano group in 13 can be further elaborated via a variety of standard methods.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00046
  • Scheme 4 provides a method for preparing compounds of Formula I wherein X is oxygen, R1 is hydrogen and Ar1 is equivalent to Ar2. Step 1 entails Suzuki coupling reaction of dichloropyazine 14 to obtain diarylpyrazine 15. In step 2, the N-oxide of diarylpyrazine 15 is prepared by standard methodology. Treatment of N-oxide 16 with phosphorous oxychloride in step 3 provides chloropyrazine 17. Reaction of chloropyrazine 17 with alkoxide in step 4 provides alkoxypyrazine 18.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00047
  • In Scheme 5, chloropyrazine 17 from Scheme 4 is elaborated according to Scheme 1.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00048
  • Scheme 6 illustrates a method for preparing pyrimidines of Formula I wherein X is nitrogen. In Step 1, dialkoxybromopyrimidine 18 is reacted with aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to obtain arylpyrimidine 19. Demethylation of 19 in step 2 under acidic conditions provides dihydroxypyrimidine 20. Treatment of 20 with phosphorous oxychloride in step 3 provides dichloropyrimidine 21. In step 4, dichloropyrimidine 21 is treated with alkylamine in the presence of base to provide, after separation from the resulting isomeric mixture of displacement products, 2-aminopyrimidine 22. Arylation in Step 5 provides 23. Those skilled in the art will recognize that Scheme 5 can readily be modified to produce compounds of Formula I wherein Ar1 or Ar2 is a saturated heterocycle such as morpholine.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00049
  • Scheme 7 provides a method for preparing certain triazines of Formula I. In step 1, an aqueous solution of S-methyl-thio-semicarbazide hydrogen iodide 25 is reacted with oxo-aryl-acetic acid methyl ester 24 to obtain 3-thiomethyltriazine 26. Oxidation of 26 to the corresponding sulfone 27 is accomplished in step 2. In step 3, the sulfone group is displaced with substituted amine to obtain 3-aminotriazine 28. Treatment of 28 with sodium methanethiolate followed by reaction with phosphorous oxychloride in step 4 provides chlorotriazine 29. Arylation of 29 under standard Suzuki coupling conditions provides 30.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00050
  • Scheme 8 illustrates a method for preparing diaryl pyridine compounds of Formula I wherein C is nitrogen. In step 1, 2-chloro-3-hydroxypyridine 31 is alkylated with alkyl halide (RBr or RI) and converted to the corresponding iodopyridine 32 wherein the substituent OR is an alkoxy substituent. Step 2 entails selective displacement of the chloro substituent in 32 to obtain aminopyridine 33. In step 3, 33 is brominated or chlorinated to obtain dihalopyridine 34. Selective reaction of the iodo substitutent in 34 in step 4 under Suzuki coupling conditions provides aryl pyridine 35. Further Suzuki reaction of 35 in step 5 provides diaryl pyridine 36.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00051
  • Scheme 9 provides a method for the preparation of certain pyridines of formula I. In step 1 2,6-dibromopyridine 37 is heated with an amine in the presence of a base and optionally a solvent to afford the 2-bromo-6-aminopyridine 38 which is reacted with an aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to obtain arylpyridine 39. Bromination of 39 in step 3 provides the bromo-pyridine 40 which is further reacted with an aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to give the diaryl pyridine 41.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00052
  • Scheme 10 illustrates a method for the preparation of certain pyridines of formula I. 2,4-Dichloropyridine 42 is heated with an amine in the presence of a base and optionally a solvent to afford the 4-chloro-2-aminopyridine 43. Reacting 43 with an arylboronic acid under Suzuki reaction conditions results in the 4-arylpyridine 44. Pyridine 44 is brominated and the resulting bromo-pyridine 45 is reacted with an arylboronic acid under Suzuki reaction conditions results in the diaryl pyridine 46.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00053
  • Scheme 11 provides a method for the preparation of certain pyridines of formula I. In step 1 3,6-dibromopyridine 47 is heated with an amine in under Buchwald type conditions to afford the 3-bromo-5-aminopyridine 48. This pyridine 48 is reacted with an aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to obtain aryl pyridine 49. Bromination of 49 in step 3 provides the bromo-pyridine 50 which is further reacted with an aryl boronic acid under Suzuki coupling conditions to give the diaryl pyridine 51.
    Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00054
  • Scheme 12 provides a method for preparing diaryl pyridazines of Formula I. In step 1, 52 is cyclized under acidic conditions to provide aryl maleic anhydride 53. Reaction of aryl maleic anhydride 53 with hydrazine in step 2 provides 54. In step 3, 54 is converted to dichloropyridazine 55 by heating with phosphorous oxychloride. Treatment of dichloropyridazine 55 with alkylamine and base in step 4 provides a mixture of products. In some cases, the yield for this reaction can be improved by use of palladium (0) catalyst (e.g. Buchwald coupling conditions). Separation of the desired aminopyridazine product 56 followed by reaction under Suzuki conditions provides diaryl pyridazine 57.
  • In certain embodiments, a compound provided herein may contain one or more asymmetric carbon atoms, so that the compound can exist in different stereoisomeric forms. Such forms can be, for example, racemates or optically active forms. As noted above, all stereoisomers are encompassed by the present invention. Nonetheless, it may be desirable to obtain single enantiomers (i.e., optically active forms). Standard methods for preparing single enantiomers include asymmetric synthesis and resolution of the racemates. Resolution of the racemates can be accomplished, for example, by conventional methods such as crystallization in the presence of a resolving agent, or chromatography using, for example a chiral HPLC column.
  • Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope. Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14C), hydrogen (e.g., 3H), sulfur (e.g., 35S) or iodine (e.g., 125I). Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum-catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous-catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate. In addition, certain precursors may be subjected to tritium-halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate. Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds.
  • Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more compounds provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient. Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose or dextrans), mannitol, proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives. In addition, other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral (including, but not limited to, sublingual), nasal, rectal or parenteral administration. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique. In certain embodiments, compositions suitable for oral use are preferred. Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs. Within yet other embodiments, compositions of the present invention may be formulated as a lyophilizate.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations. Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. Such excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc). The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with excipients suitable for the manufacture of aqueous suspensions. Such excipients include suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally-occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate). Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations. Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally-occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide (e.g., polyoxyethylene sorbitan monoleate). An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components. Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery. Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols (e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols (e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols (e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid-based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices. A composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials. Examples of such components are described in Martindale—The Extra Pharmacopoeia (Pharmaceutical Press, London 1993) and Martin (ed.), Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences. Formulations may comprise microcapsules, such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
  • A topical formulation may be prepared in a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions. Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing. Controlled release vehicles can also be used.
  • A pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile indictable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. The compound(s) provided herein, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle. Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of indictable compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • Compounds may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration). Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug. Suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • Compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane).
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for release at a pre-determined rate. Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract). Controlled release formulations (i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration) may be administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at a target site. In general, a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period. One type of controlled-release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate. Preferably, the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours. Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site. Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled-release coating. The release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • The matrix material, which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s). For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed. Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet). Alternatively, or in addition, active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying. Optionally, additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution). The matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form.
  • In certain embodiments, a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium). The controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free. Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH-independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body). It will be apparent that multiple coatings may be employed (e.g., to allow release of a portion of the dose in the stomach and a portion further along the gastrointestinal tract). For example, a portion of active ingredient(s) may be coated over an enteric coating, and thereby released in the stomach, while the remainder of active ingredient(s) in the matrix core is protected by the enteric coating and released further down the GI tract. pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
  • In certain embodiments, the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration. Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing. Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACOAT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, Pa.) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, Pa.), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions. Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EUDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, N.J.) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • The physical properties of coatings that comprise an aqueous dispersion of a hydrophobic material may be improved by the addition or one or more plasticizers. Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin. Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
  • Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion. If desired, the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use. Certain such pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses (e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water-soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts. Alternatively, or in addition, a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,668,232).
  • Further examples of controlled release formulations, and components thereof, may be found, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,524,060; 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128; 5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474; 5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394; 6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094; 6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference for its teaching of the preparation of controlled release dosage forms.
  • In addition to or together with the above modes of administration, a compound provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock). Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
  • Compound(s) provided herein are generally administered in a therapeutically effective amount. Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day (e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses (e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
  • The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated and the particular mode of administration. Dosage units will generally contain from about 10 μg to about 500 mg of an active ingredient. In certain embodiments, the dosage unit contains an amount of the compound that is sufficient to effect a decrease in the patient's caloric intake (i.e., an appetite-suppressing amount) following single dose administration or repeated administration according to a predetermined regimen. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may be used for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation. Such conditions include, for example:
    • appetite disorders (e.g., binge eating disorder, bulimia, anorexia);
    • obesity and complications associated therewith, including left ventricular hypertrophy;
    • weight loss or control (e.g., reducing calorie or food intake and/or appetite suppression); and
    • addictive disorders such as:
      • alcohol dependency (e.g., alcohol abuse, addiction and/or dependency including treatment for abstinence, craving reduction and relapse prevention of alcohol intake);
      • nicotine dependency (e.g., smoking addiction, cessation and/or dependency including treatment for craving reduction and relapse prevention of tobacco smoking); and
      • drug dependency (e.g., chronic treatment with or abuse of drugs such as opioids, barbiturates, cannabis, cocaine, amphetamines, phencyclide, hallucinogens, and/or benzodiazepines).
    • metabolic disorders (e.g., type 2 diabetes, dyslipidemia and metabolic syndrome);
    • bone loss (e.g., resulting from estrogen deficiency).
  • Other conditions responsive to CB1 modulation include CNS disorders (e.g., anxiety, depression, panic disorder, bipolar disorder, psychosis, schizophrenia, behavioral addiction, dementia (including memory loss, Alzheimer's disease, dementia of aging, vascular dementia, mild cognitive impairment, age-related cognitive decline, and mild neurocognitive disorder), attention deficit disorder (ADD/ADHD), stress, amnesia, cognitive disorders, memory disorders, neurodegeneration, cerebellar and spinocerebellar disorder, cranial trauma, cerebral vascular accidents, obsessive-compulsive disorder, senile dementia, impulsivity), thymic disorders, septic shock, Tourette's syndrome, Huntington's chorea, Raynaud's syndrome, peripheral neuropathy, diabetes (type II or non insulin dependent), glaucoma, migraine, seizure disorders, epilepsy, locomotor disorders (movement disorders induced by medicaments, dyskinesias or Parkinson's disease), respiratory disorders (such as asthma), gastrointestinal disorders (e.g., dysfunction of gastrointestinal motility or intestinal propulsion, constipation, chronic intestinal pseudo-obstruction, irritable bowel syndrome, Crohn's disease), liver cirrhosis, vomiting, diarrhea, ulcer, multiple sclerosis, cardiovascular disorder, dystonia, endotoxemic shocks, hemorrhagic shocks, hypotension, insomnia, a disorder of the endocrine system, urinary or bladder disorders, cancer, infectious disease, inflammation, infection, cancer, neuroinflammation (such as atherosclerosis), Guillain-Barre syndrome, viral encephalitis, cranial trauma, sepsis, hair loss or a reproductive disorder. In certain embodiments, the condition responsive to CB1 modulation is an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder and/or bone loss.
  • Certain pharmaceutical compositions provided herein comprise a first agent that is a compound as provided herein in combination with a second agent that differs in structure from the first agent and is suitable for treating the condition of interest. In certain embodiments, the second agent is not a CB1 antagonist as provided herein. In certain embodiments, the second agent is suitable for treating an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder and/or bone loss. Representative second agents for use within such pharmaceutical compositions include anti-obesity agents such as MCH receptor antagonists, apo-B/MTP inhibitors, 11β-hydroxy steroid dehydrogenase-1 inhibitors, peptide YY3-36 or an analog thereof, MCR-4 agonists, CCK-A agonists, monoamine reuptake inhibitors, sympathomimetic agents, β3 adrenergic receptor agonists, dopamine agonists, melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor analogues, 5-HT2c receptor agonists, leptin or an analog thereof, leptin receptor agonists, galanin antagonists, lipase inhibitors, bombesin agonists, neuropeptide-Y receptor antagonists, thyromimetic agents, dehydroepiandrosterone or analog thereof, glucocorticoid receptor antagonists, orexin receptor antagonists, glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists, ciliary neurotrophic factors, human agouti-related protein antagonists, ghrelin receptor antagonists, histamine 3 receptor antagonists, and neuromedin U receptor agonists. Such agents include, for example, phentermine, orlistat and sibutramine (e.g., sibutramine HCl monohydrate, sold as Meridia® (Abbott Laboratories)).
  • Representative second agents suitable for treating an addictive disorder include, for example, Methadone, LAAM (levo-alpha-acetyl-methadol), naltrexone (e.g., ReVia™), ondansetron (e.g., Zofran®), sertraline (e.g., Zoloft®), fluoxetine (e.g., Prozac®), diazepam (e.g., Valium®) and chlordiazepoxide (e.g., Librium), varenicline and buproprion (e.g., Zyban® or Wellbutrin®). Other representative second agents for use within the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein include nicotine receptor partial agonists, opioid antagonists and/or dopaminergic agents.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to CB1 modulation (e.g., treatment of appetite disorder, obesity and/or addictive disorder, or other disorder indicated above). Packaged pharmaceutical preparations generally comprise a container holding a pharmaceutical composition as described above and instructions (e.g., labeling) indicating that the composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation in a patient. In certain embodiments, a packaged pharmaceutical preparation comprises one or more compounds provided herein and one or more additional agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same container (i.e., as a mixture). Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like). In certain embodiments, the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the components are to be taken together for the treatment of an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder and/or bone loss.
  • Methods of Use
  • Within certain aspects, the present invention provides methods for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation in a patient and/or for appetite suppression. The patient may be afflicted with such a condition, or may be free of symptoms but considered at risk for developing such a condition. A condition is “responsive to CB1 modulation” if the condition or symptom(s) thereof are alleviated, attenuated, delayed or otherwise improved by modulation of CB1 activity. Such conditions include, for example, appetite disorders, obesity, addictive disorders, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, memory disorders, cognitive disorders, movement disorders, metabolic disorders and bone loss, as well as other disorders indicated above. In general, such methods comprise administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound as provided herein.
  • It will be apparent that compounds provided herein may be administered alone or in combination with one or more additional agents that are suitable for treating the disorder of interest. Within combination therapy, the compound(s) and additional agent(s) may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order. Representative additional agents for use in such methods include the second agents described above.
  • Suitable dosages for compounds provided herein (either alone or within such combination therapy) are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of any additional agent(s) can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions or in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, combination administration results in a reduction of the dosage of the additional agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount). Thus, preferably, the dosage of additional agent in a combination or combination treatment method of the invention is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the agent without combination with a compound of Formula I. More preferably this dose is less than ¾, even more preferably less than ½, and highly preferably less than 1/4 of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the agent(s) when administered without combination administration as described herein. It will be apparent that the dose of compound as provided herein needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be affected by the dose and potency of the additional agent.
  • Administration to the patient can be by way of any means discussed above, including oral, topical, nasal or transdermal administration, or intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intrathecal, epidural, intracerebroventrilcular or like injection. Oral administration is preferred in certain embodiments (e.g., formulated as pills, capsules, tablets or the like).
  • Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated. In general, a dosage regimen of 4 times daily or less is preferred, with 1 or 2 times daily particularly preferred. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. Dosages are generally as described above; in general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented. For example, treatment of obesity is considered to be effective if it results in a statistically significant decrease in weight or BMI.
  • Within separate aspects, the present invention provides a variety of non-pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the compounds provided herein. For example, such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of CB1 (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof). In addition, compounds provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group (such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group) may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites. In addition, compounds provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity, as standards for determining the ability of a candidate agent to bind to CB1, or as radiotracers for positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or for single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT). Such methods can be used to characterize CB1 receptors in living subjects. For example, a compound may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and incubated with a sample for a suitable incubation time (e.g., determined by first assaying a time course of binding). Following incubation, unbound compound is removed (e.g., by washing), and bound compound detected using any method suitable for the label employed (e.g., autoradiography or scintillation counting for radiolabeled compounds; spectroscopic methods may be used to detect luminescent groups and fluorescent groups). As a control, a matched sample containing labeled compound and a greater (e.g., 10-fold greater) amount of unlabeled compound may be processed in the same manner. A greater amount of detectable label remaining in the test sample than in the control indicates the presence of CB1 in the sample. Detection assays, including receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of CB1 in cultured cells or tissue samples may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York.
  • Compounds provided herein may further be used within assays for the identification of other non-competitive antagonists of CB1. In general, such assays are standard competition binding assays, in which a labeled compound as provided herein is displaced by a test compound. Briefly, such assays are performed by: (a) contacting CB1 with a labeled (e.g., radiolabeled) compound and a test compound, under conditions that permit binding to CB1 (b) removing unbound labeled compound and unbound test compound; (c) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled compound; and (d) comparing the signal to a reference signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled compound in a similar assay performed in the absence of test compound. In practice, the reference signal and the signal described in step (c) are generally obtained simultaneously (e.g., the assays are performed in different wells of the same plate); in addition, multiple concentrations of test compound are generally assayed. Non-competitive antagonist activity can be confirmed for test compounds that decrease the amount of bound, labeled compound using procedures described herein.
  • The following Examples are offered by way of illustration and not by way of limitation. Unless otherwise specified all reagents and solvent are of standard commercial grade (available, for example, from Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.)) and are used without further purification. Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein.
    • EXAMPLES
  • Mass spectroscopy data in the following Examples is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode using a Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Micromass, Beverly Mass.), equipped with a Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp.; Milford, Mass.), Waters 996 photodiode array detector, and a Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, Wis.). MassLynx (Advanced Chemistry Development, Inc; Toronto, Canada) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx Global Server™, OpenLynx™ and AutoLynx™ processing is used for data collection and analysis. MS conditions are as follows: capillary voltage=3.5 kV; cone voltage=30 V, desolvation and source temperature=350° C. and 120° C., respectively; mass range=181-750 with a scan time of 0.22 seconds and an interscan delay of 0.05 min.
  • Sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50×4.6 mm Chromolith SpeedROD RP-18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at a flow rate of 6 ml/min. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340 nm UV range. The elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A—95% water, 5% MeOH with 0.05% TFA; Mobile Phase B—5% water, 95% MeOH with 0.025% TFA. The following gradient is used: 0-0.5 min 10-100% B, hold at 100% B to 1.2 min, return to 10% B at 1.21 min. Inject to inject cycle is 2.15 min.
    • Example 1 SYNTHESIS OF 1-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(2-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE STEP 1. 1-(6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00055
  • A mixture of 2,6-dichloro-pyrazine (3.3 g, 22 mmol), 4-ethylamino-piperidine-4-carboxylic acid amide (3.85 g, 22.5 mmol) and K2CO3 (3.7 g, 26 mmol)- in CH3CN (30 mL) is heated at 100° C. for 1 h. The reaction mixture is cooled and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is mixed with water and filtered to collect a white solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 7.08 (br, 1H), 5.37 (br, 1H), 3.91 (m, 2H), 3.46 (m, 2H), 2.56 (q, 2H), 2.17 (m, 2H), 1.70 (m, 2H), 1.12 (t, 3H).
    • STEP 2. 1-(5-BROMO-6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00056
  • A mixture of 1-(6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-4-ethylamino-piperidine-4-carboxylic acid amide (449 mg, 1.58 mmol) and NBS (300 mg, 1.68 mmol) in CHCl3 (5 mL) is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with CH2Cl2 (20 mL), washed with aqueous Na2CO3 solution and water, and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified on silica gel column with 5% MeOH in CH2Cl2 to give the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.77 (s, 1H), 7.06 (br, 1H), 5.34 (br, 1H), 3.85 (m, 2H), 3.48 (m, 2H), 2.56 (q, 2H), 2.15 (m, 2H), 1.71 (m, 2H), 1.11 (t, 3H).
    • STEP 3. 1-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(2-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00057
  • A mixture of 1-(5-bromo-6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-4-ethylamino-piperidine-4-carboxylic acid amide (29 mg, 0.08 mmol), 4-chlorophenylboronic acid (13 mg, 0.08 mmol), Na2CO3 (34 mg, 0.32 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (5 mg), water (0.3 mL) and dioxane (0.8 mL) is degassed with argon for 10 min, then sealed and heated at 105° C. for 1 h. The reaction mixture is cooled, and 2-chlorophenylboronic acid (13 mg, 0.08 mmol) is added. The reaction mixture is sealed again and heated at 105° C. for 1 h. The mixture is cooled, diluted with water (1 mL) and 1 N NaOH (0.5 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (2 mL). The extract is washed once with water and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.23 (s, 1H), 7.13-7.35 (m, 8H), 7.12 (br, 1H), 5.58 (br, 1H), 4.08 (m, 2H), 3.46 (m, 2H), 2.56 (q, 2H), 2.20 (m, 2H), 1.74 (m, 2H), 1.11 (t, 3H).
    • Example 2 SYNTHESIS OF 1-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(2,4-DICHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00058
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 1. LC-MS: m/z expected 504.8; found 505.0 (MH+).
    • Example 3 SYNTHESIS OF 1-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(2,4-DICHLOROPHENYL)-3-(METHYLAMINO)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXAMIDE STEP 1.1-[3-BROMO-5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(2,4-DICHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00059
  • A mixture of 1-[5-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-4-ethylamino-piperidine-4-carboxylic acid amide (20 mg, 0.04 mmol) and NBS (11 mg, 0.06 mmol) in CHCl3 (1 mL) is stirred at rt for 3 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with CH2Cl2 (1 mL), washed with aqueous Na2CO3 and water, and concentrated to give the title compound, which is used in the next step without further purification.
    • STEP 2. 1-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(2,4-DICHLOROPHENYL)-3-METHYLAMINO-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00060
  • A mixture of the product from Step 1 and methylamine (4M in NMP, 1 mL) in a sealed tube is heated at 130° C. overnight. The mixture is diluted with CH2Cl2, and washed with water (5 times) and concentrated. The residue is purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. LC-MS: m/z expected 533.9; found 534.05 (MH+), Rt=1.60 min.
    • Example 4 SYNTHESIS OF 1-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE STEP 1. 1-[6-CHLORO-5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00061
  • A mixture of 1-(5-bromo-6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-4-ethylamino-piperidine-4-carboxylic acid amide (Example 1; 580 mg, 1.6 mmol), 4-chlorophenylboronic acid (263 mg, 1.6 mmol), Na2CO3 (353 mg, 3.2 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (80 mg), water (3.4 mL) and dioxane (17 mL) is degassed with argon for 10 min, then sealed and heated at 105° C. for 6 h. The mixture is cooled, diluted with water and I N NaOH, and extracted with EtOAc. The extract is washed once with water and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound.
    • STEP 2. 1-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-4-ETHYLAMINO-PIPERIDINE-4-CARBOXYLIC ACID AMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00062
  • A mixture of 1-[6-chloro-5-(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-4-ethylamino-piperidine-4-carboxylic acid amide (26 mg, 0.065 mmol), 3-chloro-pyridine-4-yl boronic acid (31 mg, 0.2 mmol), Na2CO3 (43 mg, 0.41 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (8 mg), water (0.4 mL) and dioxane (1.0 mL) is degassed with argon for 10 min, then sealed and heated at 130° C. for overnight. The mixture is cooled, diluted with water (1 mL) and 1 N NaOH (0.5 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (2 mL). The extract is washed once with water and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. LC-MS: m/z expected 471.4; found 472.2 (MH+), Rt=1.43 min.
    • Example 5 SYNTHESIS OF TERT-BUTYL 4-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-2-PYRAZINYL]-1-PIPERAZINECARBOXYLATE STEP 1. tert-BUTYL-4-(6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00063
  • A mixture of 2,6-dichloro-pyrazine (15 g, 0.1 mol), piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (19.7 g, 0.1 mmol) and K2CO3 (47 g, 0.3 mol) in CH3CN (150 mL) is stirred at rt for 18 h and heated at 70° C. for 2 h. The reaction mixture is evaporated under vacuum, diluted with water (150 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (3×75 mL). The combined extracts are washed with brine (100 mL), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under vacuum to give the title compound as a colorless viscous oil.
    • STEP 2. TERT-BUTYL-4-(5-BROMO-6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00064
  • A mixture of tert-butyl-4-(6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-piperazine-1-carboxylate (29.8 g, 0.1 mol) and NBS (17.8 g, 0.1 mol) in CHCl3 (250 mL) is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is washed with diluted aqueous Na2CO3 solution and brine, dried and concentrated under vacuum and purified by flash column chromatography using 5 to 40% EtOAc in hexane to afford the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.76 (s, 1H), 3.56 (m, 8H), 1.48 (s, 9H).
    • STEP 3. tert-BUTYL-4-[6-CHLORO-5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00065
  • The product of step 2 is converted to the title compound via the Suzuki coupling procedure described in Example 4, Step 1. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.67 (d, 2H), 7.42 (d, 2H), 3.64 (m, 4H), 3.58 (m, 4H), 1.49 (s, 9H).
    • STEP 4. tert-BUTYL-4-[5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-2-PYRAZINYL]-1-PIPERAZINECARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00066
  • The product of step 3 is converted to the title compound via the Suzuki coupling procedure described in Example 4, Step 2. 1H NMR (CDCl3) 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.51 (d, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 7.26 (m, 5H), 3.67 (m, 4H), 3.60 (m, 4H), 1.48 (s, 9H).
    • Example 6 SYNTHESIS OF 2-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(1-PIPERAZINYL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00067
  • A solution of tert-butyl-4-[5-(4-chlorophenyl)-6-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-2-pyrazinyl]-1-piperazinecarboxylate (475 mg, 0.98 mmol) and TFA (2 mL) in CH2Cl2 is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is evaporated under vacuum, basified with aqueous Na2CO3 solution, and extracted with EtOAc. The extract is washed with brine, dried and concentrated to give the title compound.
    • Example 7 SYNTHESIS OF 2-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-[4-(ISOPROPYLSULFONYL)-1-PIPERAZINYL]-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00068
  • To solution of 2-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(1-piperazinyl)-pyrazine (2 mg, 0.057 mmol) and ethyl-diisopropyl-amine (22 mg, 0.17 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) is added isopropylsulfonyl chloride (8.5 mg, 0.06 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at rt for 15 min, washed with water, concentrated and purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. LC-MS: m/z expected 492.4; found 493.0 (MH+), Rt=1.69 min.
    • Example 8 SYNTHESIS OF 2-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-ISOBUTYRYL-1-PIPERAZINYL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00069
  • This compound is prepared by reaction of 2-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(1-piperazinyl)-pyrazine with isobutyryl chloride following the procedure given in the previous example. LC-MS: m/z expected 456.4; found 457.2 (MH+), Rt=1.66 min.
    • Example 9 SYNTHESIS OF 2-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-ISOBUTYL-1-PIPERAZINYL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00070
  • A mixture of 2-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(1-piperazinyl)-pyrazine (14 mg, 0.036 mmol), 2-methyl-propionaldehyde (4 mg, 0.056 mmol) and NaBH(OAc)3 (22 mg, 0.1 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) is stirred at rt for 2 h. The mixture is washed with aqueous Na2CO3 solution, concentrated under vacuum, and purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. LC-MS: m/z expected 442.4; found 443.2 (MH+), Rt=1.42 min.
    • Example 10 SYNTHESIS OF 2-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-ISOBUTYL-1-PIPERAZINYL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00071
  • A mixture of 2-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(1-piperazinyl)-pyrazine (14 mg, 0.036 mmol), 2-chloro-4-methyl-pyrimidine (18 mg, 0.14 mmol) and K2CO3 (30 mg, 0.22 mmol) in CH3CN (1 mL) is stirred at reflux overnight. The mixture is washed with aqueous Na2CO3 solution, concentrated under vacuum, and purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. LC-MS: m/z expected 478.4; found 479.2 (MH+), Rt=1.84 min.
    • Example 11 SYNTHESIS OF 4-[3-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(1,1-DIOXIDO-4-THIOMORPHOLINYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-BENZONITRILE STEP 1. 4-(6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-THIOMORPHOLINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00072
  • A mixture of 2,6-dichloro-pyrazine (6.0 g, 0.4 mol), thiomorpholine (4.2 g, 0.4 mmol) and K2CO3 (11.2 g, 0.8 mol) in CH3CN (50 mL) is heated at 80° C. overnight. The reaction mixture is evaporated under vacuum, diluted with water (150 mL), filtered and dried to give the title compound as a tan solid.
    • STEP 2. 4-(5-BROMO-6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-THIOMORPHOLINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00073
  • A mixture of 4-(6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-thiomorpholine (4.2 g, 0.02 mol) and NBS (5.2 g, 0.029 mol) in CHCl3 (100 mL) is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is washed with aqueous Na2CO3 and brine, dried, concentrated under vacuum, and purified by flash column chromatography using 100% CH2Cl2 to afford the title compound.
    • STEP 3. 4-(5-BROMO-6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-THIOMORPHOLINE 1,1-DIOXIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00074
  • A mixture of 4-(5-bromo-6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-thiomorpholine (2.47 g, 8.4 mmol) and m-CPBA (77%, 3.95 g, 17.6 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (50 mL) is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is washed with aqueous Na2CO3 and water, concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography using 2.5% MeOH in CH2Cl2 to afford the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.90 (s, 1H), 4.16 (m, 4H), 3.09 (m, 4H).
    • STEP 4. 4-[3-CHLORO-5-(1,1-DIOXIDOTHIOMORPHOLIN4-YL)- PYRAZIN-2-YL]BENZONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00075
  • The product of step 3 is converted to the title compound with 4-cyanophenyl boronic acid via the Suzuki coupling procedure used in Example 4, Step 1. LC-MS: m/z expected 348.8; found 350.2 (MH+), Rt=1.38 min.
    • STEP 5. 4-[3-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(1,1-DIOXIDOTHIOMORPHOLIN4-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]BENZONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00076
  • The product of step 4 is converted to the title compound via the Suzuki coupling procedure used in Example 4, Step 2. LC-MS: m/z expected 425.9; found 427.2 (MH+), Rt=1.47 min.
    • Example 12 SYNTHESIS OF tert-BUTYL-4-[5-BROMO-6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE STEP 1. tert-BUTYL-4-(6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00077
  • tert-Butyl-1-piperazine carboxylate (8.8 g, 47.5 mmol) is added to a suspension of 2,6-dichloro-pyrazine (6.4 g, 43.2 mmol) and potassium carbonate (18.0 g, 130 mmol) in anhydrous acetonitrile (100 mL). After addition, the reaction mixture is stirred at 90° C. for 3 h, and the reaction is monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt and then diluted with ether (100 mL) and water (50 mL). The organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ether (2×100 mL). The combined organic layers are dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and the solvents are removed in vacuo to give the title compound as a white solid.
    • STEP 2. tert-BUTYL-4-[6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00078
  • 4-Chlorophenylboronic acid (2.1 g, 13.5 mmol) is added to a solution of 2 tert-butyl-4-(6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-piperazine-1-carboxylate (4.0 g, 13.5 mmol) in a mixture of dioxane (60 mL), water (10 mL) and 2N sodium carbonate (13.5 mL, 27 mmol). The solution is degassed by bubbling nitrogen through the solution for 10 min and is then charged with Pd(PPh3)4 (780 mg, 5 mol %). After addition, the reaction mixture is stirred at 100° C. for 6 h, and the reaction is monitored by TLC. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt and then diluted with ether (100 mL) and water (50 mL). The organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ether (2×50 mL). The combined organic layers are dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and the solvents are removed in vacuo to give the title compound as an off-white solid.
    • STEP 3. tert-BUTYL-4-[5-BROMO-6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00079
  • NBS (1.94 g, 10.88 mmol) is added portionwise to a solution of tert-butyl-4-[6-(4-chloro-phenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl)-piperazine-1-carboxylate (4.08 g, 10.88 mmol) in CHCL3 (50 mL) at 0° C. The reaction is stirred at 0° C. for 1 h, and then allowed to warm to rt and stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with ether (200 mL), washed with water (2×50 mL) and then with brine, and dried over anhydrous MgSO4. The solvents are removed in vacuo. Purification using flash column chromatography (silica gel) with 25% EtOAc in hexane as eluent gives the title compound as a pale yellow solid.
    • Example 13 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR THE SUZUKI REACTION OF ARYL BORONIC ACIDS WITH tert-BUTYL-4-[5-BROMO-6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00080
  • Arylboronic acid (0.21 mmol) is added to a solution of tert-butyl-4-[5-bromo-(6-chlorophenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-piperazine-1-carboxylate (80 mg, 0.18 mmol) in a mixture of dioxane (3 mL), water (0.5 mL) and 2N sodium carbonate solution (0.18 mL, 0.36 mmol). The solution is degassed by bubbling nitrogen through the solution for 2 min and is then charged with Pd(PPh3)4 (10 mg, 5 mol %). After addition, the reaction mixture is stirred at 100° C. for 16 h. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt and then diluted with ether (10 mL) and water (5 mL). The organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ether (2×5 mL). The combined organic layers are dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and the solvents are removed in vacuo. Purification by PTLC gives the corresponding arylation product.
    • Example 14 SYNTHESIS OF tert-BUTYL-4-[6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-(3-FLUOROPYRIDIN-4-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00081
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 13, using 3-fluoropyridine-4-boronic acid, and is obtained as a pale yellow solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz): δ 8.47 (1H, d, J=5 Hz), 8.35 (1H, d, J=2 Hz), 8.20 (1H, s), 7.66 (1H, m), 7.50 (2H, m), 7.34 (1H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.28 (1H, d, J=8 Hz), 3.75 (4H, m), 3.61 (4H, m), 1.50 (9H, s). LC-MS: m/z for C24H25ClFN5O2 expected 469.2 (35Cl), 471.2 (37Cl); found 470.3 (MH+), 472.3 (MH+).
    • Example 15 SYNTHESIS OF tert-BUTYL-4-[5-{4-(AMINOCARBONYL)-PHENYL}-6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00082
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 13, using 4-aminocarbonylphenylboronic acid, and is obtained as an off-white solid. LC-MS: m/z for C26H28ClN5O3 expected 493.2 (35Cl), 495.2 (37Cl); found 494.4 (MH+), 496.2 (MH+).
    • Example 16 SYNTHESIS OF tert-BUTYL-4-[6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-(4-CYANOPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00083
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 13, using 4-cyanophenylboronic acid, and is obtained as a white solid. LC-MS: m/z for C26H26ClN5O2 expected 475.2 (35Cl), 477.2 (37Cl); found 476.2 (MH+), 477.8 (MH+).
    • Example 17 SYNTHESIS OF tert-BUTYL-4-[5-{4-(ACETYLPHENYL}-6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00084
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 13, using 4-acetylphenylboronic acid, and is obtained as a white solid. LC-MS: m/z for C27H29ClN4O3 expected 492.2 (35Cl), 494.2 (37Cl); found 493.4 (MH+), 495.2 (MH+).
    • Example 18 SYNTHESIS OF TERT-BUTYL-4-[5-{1-(TERT-BUTOXYCARBONYL)-1H-PYRROL-2-YL}-6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00085
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 13, using 1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)pyrrol-2-boronic acid, and is obtained as a pale yellow solid. LC-MS: m/z for C28H34ClN5O4 expected 539.2 (35Cl), 541.2 (37Cl); found 540.3 (MH+), 542.3 (MH+).
    • Example 19 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR THE CATALYTIC AMINATION REACTION OF tert-BUTYL-4-[5-BROMO-6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)PYRAZIN-2-YL]PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE WITH PRIMARY AND SECONDARY AMINES
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00086
  • The corresponding primary or secondary amine (R′NHR″) (0.24 mmol) is added to a solution of tert-butyl-4-[5-bromo-(6-chlorophenyl)pyrazin-2-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (100 mg, 0.22 mmol), sodium tert-butoxide (30 mg, 0.31 mmol), tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (6 mg, 3 mol %) and rac-BINAP (12 mg, 9 mol %) in toluene (3 mL). The resulting solution is stirred at 100° C. for 6-16 h (TLC control). The reaction mixture is cooled to rt and then diluted with EtOAc (10 mL) and water (5 mL). The organic layer is separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (2×5 mL). The combined organic layers are dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and the solvents are removed in vacuo. Purification by PTLC gives the corresponding amination product.
    • Example 20 tert-BUTYL-4-[6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-(4-METHYLPIPERAZIN-1-YL)PYRAZIN-2-YL]PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00087
  • This compound is prepared as described above, using 1-methylpiperazine as the corresponding amine, and is obtained as a yellow solid; 1H NMR (CDCl3, 300 MHz): δ 8.21 (2H, d, J=9 Hz), 7.73 (1H, s), 7.38 (2H, d, J=9 Hz), 3.58 (4H, m), 3.49 (4H, m), 3.11 (4H, m), 2.57 (4H, m), 2.38 (3H, s), 1.48 (9H, s); LC-MS: m/z for C24H33ClN6O2 expected 472.2 (35Cl), 474.2 (37Cl); found 473.4 (MH+), 475.2 (MH+).
    • Example 21 tert-BUTYL-4-[6-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-MORPHOLIN-4-YLPYRAZIN-2-YL]PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00088
  • This compound is prepared as described above, using morpholine as the corresponding amine, and is obtained as a yellow solid; LC-MS: m/z for C23H30ClN5O3 expected 459.2 (35Cl), 461.2 (37Cl); found 460.4 (MH+), 462.4 (MH+).
    • Example 22 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR PREPARATION OF 2-ALKOXYL-5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZINE-3-CARBONITRILE STEP 1. 1,2-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-2-HYDROXYETHANONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00089
  • To 4-chlorobenzaldehyde (14.06 g, 100 mmol) in EtOH (20 ml) is added a solution of sodium cyanide (1.06 g, 21.6 mmol) in water (10 ml). The mixture is heated to reflux for 2.5 h and then extracted with DCM. The organic phase is washed with sodium bisulfite solution, dried with MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The compound is isolated by crystallization from ether/heptane. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.82 (d, 2H), 7.38 (d, 2H), 7.30 (d, 2H), 7.24 (d, 2H), 5.87 (s, 1H), 4.47 (s, 1H).
    • STEP 2. 1,2-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)ETHAN-1,2-DIONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00090
  • A mixture of 1,2-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-2-hydroxyethanone (5.6 g, 20 mmol) and NBS (10.68 g, 60 mmol) in dry carbon tetrachloride (200 ml) is refluxed in an oil bath. The reaction is monitored by TLC. After the reaction is completed and quenched by water (100 ml). The aqueous layer is extracted with carbon tetrachloride (2×100 ml). The combined organic layers are dried over anhydrous MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is recrystallized in EtOH to give the title compound as light yellow crystals. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.94 (d, 4H), 7.53 (d, 4H).
    • STEP 3. 5, 6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZINE-2,3-DICARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00091
  • 1,2-bis(4-chlorophenyl)ethan-1,2-dione, (5.1 g, 18.3 mmol), diaminomaleonitrile (2.18, 20.2 mmol) and AcOH (1.5 ml) in EtOH (40 ml) and water (25 ml) are heated at 75° C. overnight. The reaction mixture is cooled and diluted with water (50 ml). The precipitate is filtered and washed with EtOH and ether to give the title compound as a pale yellow solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.49 (d, 4H), 7.33 (d, 4H).
    • STEP 4. GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR THE SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-ALKOXYL-PYRAZINE-2-CARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00092
  • 60% Sodium hydride (18 mg, 0.45 mmol) is added to a stirred mixture of 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile (105 mg, 0.3 mmol) and an alcohol (0.36 mmol) in THF (2.5 ml). Stirring is continued overnight, followed by evaporation. PTLC purification is used to isolate the product.
    • Example 23 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-(2-METHOXY-ETHOXY)-PYRAZINE-2-CARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00093
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 2-methoxyethanol as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.30-7.41 (m, 8H), 4.70 (dd, 2H), 3.83 (dd, 2H), 3.47 (s, 3H).
    • Example 24 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-[2-(2-ETHOXY-ETHOXY)-ETHOXY]-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00094
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethanol as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.30-7.43 (m, 8H), 4.71 (dd, 2H), 3.96 (dd, 2H), 3.75 (dd, 2H), 3.61 (dd, 2H), 3.54 (q, 2H), 1.22 (t, 3H).
    • Example 25 SYNTHESIS OF 4-[5,6-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-CYANO-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY]-PIPERIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00095
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 1-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-4-hydroxypiperidine as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.30-7.4 (m, 8H), 5.54 (m, 1H), 3.74 (m, 2H), 3.47 (m, 2H), 1.48 (s, 9H).
    • Example 26 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-[(3R)-TETRAHYDRO-3-FURANYLOXY]-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00096
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and R-(−)3-hydroxytetrahydrofuran as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.30-7.41 (m, 8H), 5.69 (m, 1H), 3.96-4.18 (m, 4H), 2.29-2.37 (m, 2H).
    • Example 27 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-(TETRAHYDRO-2-FuRANYLMETHOXY)-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00097
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 2-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydrofuran as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.29-7.41(m, 8H), 4.56 (d, 2H), 4.37 (m, 1H), 3.95 (m, 1H), 3.84 (m, 1H), 1.87-2.16 (m, 4H).
    • Example 28 SYNTHESIS OF TERT-BUTYL (3S)-3-{[5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-CYANO-2-PYRAZINYL]OXY}-1-PYRROLIDINECARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00098
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and S-1-(tertbutyloxycarbonyl)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.30-7.40 (m, 8H), 5.67 (m, 1H), 3.75 (d, 2H), 3.62 (m, 2H), 2.82 (m, 2H), 1.48 (s, 9H).
    • Example 29 SYNTHESIS OF TERT-BUTYL (3R)-3-{[5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-CYANO-2-PYRAZINYL]OXY}-1-PYRROLIDINECARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00099
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and R-1-(tertbutyloxycarbonyl)-3-hydroxypyrrolidine as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.30-7.40 (m, 8H), 5.67 (m, 1H), 3.75 (d, 2H), 3.62 (m, 2H), 2.82 (m, 2H), 1.48 (s, 9H).
    • Example 30 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-[2-(2-OXO-1-PYRROLIDINYL) ETHOXY]-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00100
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-pyrrolidinone as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.31-7.40 (m, 8H), 4.68 (t, 2H), 3.77 (t, 2H), 3.68 (t, 2H), 2.39 (t, 2H), 2.07 (t, 2H).
    • Example 31 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-[2-(1-PYRROLIDINYL)-ETHOXY]-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00101
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-pyrrolidine as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.30-7.42 (m, 8H), 4.68 (t, 2H), 3.01 (t, 2H), 2.68 (m, 4H), 1.87 (m, 4H).
    • Example 32 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-[2-(2,5-DIOXO-1-PYRROLIDINYL)-ETHOXY]-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00102
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-pyrrolidine-2,5-dione as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.31-7.42 (m, 8H), 4.76 (d, 2H), 3.99 (d, 2H), 2.71 (s, 4H).
    • Example 33 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-[2-(4-MORPHOLINYL)-ETHOXY]-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00103
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)morpholine as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 7.30-7.42 (m, 8H), 4.68 (t, 2H), 3.68 (t, 4H), 2.88 (t, 2H), 2.60 (t, 4H).
    • Example 34 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-FLUOROPHENYL)-3-[2-(4-PYRIDINYL)-ETHOXY]-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00104
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)pyridine as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.57 (d, 2H), 7.26-7.38 (m, 10H), 4.76 (t, 2H), 3.20 (t, 2H).
    • Example 35 SYNTHESIS OF 5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-3-[2-(2-PYRIDINYL)-ETHOXY]-2-PYRAZINECARBONITRILE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00105
  • This compound is prepared from 5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine-2,3-dicarbonitrile and 2′-(2-hydroxyethyl)pyridine as described in Example 22, Step 4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.55 (d, 1H), 7.65 (dt, 1H), 7.26-7.41 (m, 9H), 7.16 (ddd, 1H), 4.92 (t, 2H), 3.36 (t, 2H).
    • Example 36 SYNTHESIS OF 2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-(2-METHOXYETHOXY)-PYRAZINE STEP 1. 2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00106
  • To a sealed tube containing 5,6-dichloropyrazine (9.66 g, 64.6 mmol) is added 4-chlorophenylboronic acid (21.2 g, 129 mmol), potassium carbonate (26.4 g, 194 mmol) and bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) dichloride (600 mg). MeCN (150 mL) and water (150 mL) are added, and nitrogen bubbled through the mixture for 15 min. The mixture is then heated at 70° C. under nitrogen for 18 h. After cooling to rt, the organic phase is separated and the aqueous phase is extracted with EtOAc (2×200 mL). The combined organic phase is dried over anhydrous MgSO4, concentrated and purified by silica gel column chromatography to give the title compound as a white solid. MS: m/z expected 301.2; found 302.2 (MH+).
    • STEP 2. 2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZINE-N-OXIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00107
  • A solution of 2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine (21.3 g, 71 mmol), 50% H2O2 (9.66 mL, 142 mmol), and maleic anhydride (12.1 g, 124 mmol) in CHCL3 (300 mL) is refluxed for 2 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture is washed with water, 10% potassium carbonate and water, successively. The organic phase is dried over anhydrous MgSO4, concentrated and purified by silica gel column chromatography to give the title compound as a white solid.
    • STEP 3. 5-CHLORO-2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00108
  • A solution of 2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine N-oxide (12.7 g, 40 mmol) in POCl3 (80 mL) is refluxed for 20 min. After most of the POCl3 is removed under reduced pressure, the residue is poured into ice water, and made alkaline with potassium carbonate. The product is extracted with DCM, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, concentrated and purified by silica gel column chromatography to give the title compound as a light yellow solid. MS: m/z expected 335.6; found 336.1 (MH+).
    • STEP 4. 2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-(2-METHOXYETHOXY)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00109
  • A solution of 2-methoxyethanol (10 mg, 0.15 mmol) in anhydrous THF (0.5 mL) is treated with 60% NaH (6 mg) under nitrogen at rt for 30 min, followed by addition of a solution of 5-chloro-2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine (33 mg, 1 mmol) in anhydrous THF (1 mL). The mixture is stirred at 50° C. overnight, and quenched by addition of water. THF is evaporated and the residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography to give the title compound as a white foam. MS: m/z expected 375.2; found 376.1 (MH+). 1H NMR (CDCl3): 3.46 (s, 3H), 3.79 (t, J=4.5 Hz, 2H), 4.59 (t, J=4.5 Hz, 2H), 7.26-7.39 (m, 8H), 8.31 (s, 1H).
    • Example 37 SYNTHESIS OF 5-(AZETIDIN-3-YLOXY)-2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZINE STEP 1. TERT-BUTYL 3-(5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY)AZETIDINE-1-CARBOXYLATE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00110
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 36 (Step 4) using tert-butyl 3-hydroxyazetidine-1-carboxylate as starting material, and is obtained as a white solid. MS: m/z expected 472.0; found 473.0 (MH+). 1H NMR (CDCl3): 1.45 (s, 9H), 4.05 (dd, J=10.2, 4.5 Hz, 2H), 4.36 (dd, J=10.2, 4.5 Hz, 2H), 5.37-5.44 (m, 1H), 7.26-7.34 (m, 8H), 8.29 (s, 1H).
    • STEP 2. 5-(AZETIDIN-3-YLOXY)-2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00111
  • A solution of tert-butyl 3-(5,6-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazin-2-yloxy)azetidine-1-carboxylate (236 mg, 0.5 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (2 mL) is treated with TFA (1 mL) for 2 h at rt. After concentration, the residue is neutralized with saturated sodium bicarbonate and the product is extracted with DCM. The extracts are dried over anhydrous MgSO4, concentrated and purified by silica gel column chromatography to give the title compound as a white solid. MS: m/Z expected 372.2; found 373.2 (MH+).
    • Example 38 SYNTHESIS OF 1-(3-(5,6-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY)-AZETIDIN-1-YL)-2-METHYLPROPAN-1-ONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00112
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 7 by the reaction of 5-(azetidin-3-yloxy)-2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine with isobutyryl chloride.
    • Example 39 SYNTHESIS OF 2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-(1-(ISOPROPYLSULFONYL)-AZETIDIN-3-YLOXY)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00113
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 7 by the reaction of 5-(azetidin-3-yloxy)-2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine with isopropylsulfonyl chloride.
    • Example 40 SYNTHESIS OF 2,3-BIS(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-(1-(PYRIMIDIN-2-YL)-AZETIDIN-3-YLOXY)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00114
  • This compound is prepared as described in Example 10 by the reaction of 5-(azetidin-3-yloxy)-2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine with 2-chloropyrimidine.
    • Example 41 SYNTHESIS OF 4-[5,6-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-3,6-DIHYDRO-2H-PYRIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00115
  • 5-Chloro-2,3-bis(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazine (Example 36; 5 g, 14.9 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-3,6-dihydropyridine-1(2H)-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (6.9 g, 22.3 mmol), potassium carbonate (6.2 g, 45 mmol) and DMF (20 mL) are charged into a flask. The mixture is degassed, and [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]-dichloropalladium (II) DCM complex (1:1) (0.6 g, 0.73 mmol) is added to the flask. The resulting mixture is stirred at 90° C. overnight, cooled to rt and poured into cold water (60 mL). The aqueous mixture is extracted with EtOAc/hexanes (1:1, 3×40 mL). The combined organic phase is washed with water and dried over MgSO4. Removal of solvents gives a residue which is purified by column chromatography (4:1 hexanes/EtOAc) to afford the title product as an off-white solid. MS: m/z expected 481.1; found 482.3 (MH+). 1H NMR (CDCl3) 2.1-2.3 (m, 3H), 3.6-3.8 (m, 3H), 5.00 (m, 1H), 7.26-7.37 (m, 8H), 8.53 (s, 1H).
    • Example 42 SYNTHESIS OF 4-[5,6-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00116
  • To a solution of 4-[5,6-bis-(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-3,6-dihydro-2H-pyridine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (0.8 g, 1.66 mmol) in EtOH (5 mL) is added PtO2 (38 mg, 0.167 mmol). The mixture is stirred at rt under H2 for 1 h. The catalyst is removed by filtration, and flash column chromatography (hexanes/EtOAc 4:1) gives the title product. MS: m/z expected 483.2; found 506.3 (MNa+). 1H NMR (CDCl3): 1.8-2.0 (m, 4H), 2.8-3.0 (m, 3H), 4.3 (br, 2H), 7.26-7.37 (m, 8H), 8.47 (s, 1H).
    • Example 43 SYNTHESIS OF 2,3-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-PIPERIDIN-4-YL-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00117
  • To a solution of 4-[5,6-bis-(4-chlorophenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester in DCM (5 mL) is added TFA (1 mL). The mixture is stirred at rt for 2 h. Removal of volatiles gives a residue which is purified by column chromatography (20% MeOH in EtOAc) to give the title product. MS: expected 383.1; found 384.2 (MH+).
    • Example 44 SYNTHESIS OF 1-{4-[5,6-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-1-YL}-PROPAN-1-ONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00118
  • To a solution of 2,3-bis-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-piperidin-4-yl-pyrazine (38 mg, 0.1 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (2 mL) is added TEA (20 mg, 0.2 mmol), followed by propionyl chloride (9.2; mg, 0.1 mmol). The mixture is allowed to stand at rt overnight. PTLC purification gives a white solid product. MS: m/z expected 439.1; found 440.2 (MH+). 1H NMR (CDCl3): 1.18 (t, J=7.5 Hz, 3H), 1.8-2.1 (m, 4H), 2.40 (q, J=7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1H), 3.1 (m, 1H), 3.2 (m, 1H), 4.03 (d, J=13.8 Hz, 1H), 4.83 (d, J=12.9 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.39 (m, 8H), 8.47 (s, 1H).
    • Example 45 SYNTHESIS OF 1-{4-[5,6-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-1-YL}-2-METHYL-PROPAN-1-ONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00119
  • This compound is prepared following the procedure given in Example 44 by reaction of 2,3-bis-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-piperidin-4-yl-pyrazine with isobutyryl chloride. MS: m/z expected 453.1; found 454.3 (MH+).
    • Example 46 SYNTHESIS OF 3-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-(1-ETHANESULFONYL-PIPERIDIN-4-YL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00120
  • This compound is prepared following the procedure given in Example 44 by reaction of 2,3-bis-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-piperidin-4-yl-pyrazine with ethylsulfonyl chloride. MS: m/z expected 475.1; found 476.2 (MH+). 1H NMR (CDCl3): 1.40 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 2.0-2.20 (m, 4H), 2.9-3.1 (m, 4H), 3.99 (d, J=12.3 Hz, 2H), 7.26-7.40 (m, 8H), 8.48 (s, 1H).
    • Example 47 SYNTHESIS OF 2,3-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-5-[1-(PPROPANE-2-SULFONYL)-PIPERIDIN-4-YL]-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00121
  • This compound is prepared following the procedure given in Example 44 by reaction of 2,3-bis-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-piperidin-4-yl-pyrazine with isopropylsulfonyl chloride. MS: m/z expected 489.1; found 490.1 (MH+).
    • Example 48 SYNTHESIS OF 4-[5,6-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDINE-1-SULFONIC ACID DIMETHYLAMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00122
  • This compound is prepared following the procedure given in Example 44 by reaction of 2,3-bis-(4-chlorophenyl)-5-piperidin-4-yl-pyrazine with dimethylsulfamoyl chloride. MS: m/z expected 490.1; found 491.3 (MH+).
    • Example 49 SYNTHESIS OF 4,5-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-2-(4,4-DIMETHYL-1,1-DIOXIDO-1,2,5-THIADIAZOLIDIN-2-YL)-PYRIMIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00123
    • STEP 1. 5-(4-CHLOROPHENY)2,4-DIMETHOXY-PYRIMIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00124
  • A mixture of 5-bromo-2,6-dimethoxy-pyrimidine (10.0 g, 45.7 mmol), 4-chlorophenyl-boroic acid (8.6 g, 54.8 mmol), K2CO3 (15.2 g, 110 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (1 g, 3 mmol %) in degassed dioxane (30 mL) and H2O (5 mL) is heated at 100° C. for 14 h. The reaction mixture is cooled, and EtOAc is added. The organic layer is dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by flash column and eluted with 10% EtOAc in hexane to give the title compound. m/z: 250.9.
    • STEP 2. 5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)PYRIMIDINE-2,4-DIOL
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00125
  • 5-(4-Chloropheny)2,4-dimethoxy-pyrimidine (12.0 g, 47.9 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (250 mL) and HCl (con., 30 mL) and heated to 80° C. for 14 h. The reaction mixture is cooled, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure. The solid is washed with H2O and dried under vacuum (70° C.) to give the title compound.
    • STEP 3. 2,4-DICHLORO-5-(4-CHLOROPHENY)PYRIMIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00126
  • 5-(4-Chlorophenyl)pyrimidine-2,4-diol (11.0 g, 49.4 mmol) is mixed in POCl3 100 mL at rt. N,N-Diethylaniline is added, and the reaction mixture is heated to 100° C. for 12 h. The reaction mixture is cooled and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is poured into ice-H2O to form a solid. The solid is filtered and washed with H2O and dried under vacuum (70° C.) to give the title compound.
    • STEP 4. 4-CHLORO-5-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-2-(4,4-DIMETHYL-1,1-DIOXIDO-1,2,5-THIADIAZOLIDIN-2-YL)-PYRIMIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00127
  • 3,3-Dimethyl-[1,2,5]thiadiazolidine 1,1-dioxide (570 mg, 3.8 mmol) and NaH (270 mg, 6.7 mmol, 60%), is dissolved in THF and heated to 45° C. for 1 h and cooled to rt. 2,4-Dichloro-5-(4-chloro-pheny)pyrimidine (1 g, 3.8 mmol) is added, and the reaction mixture is heated to 35° C. for 14 h. The reaction mixture is cooled, and saturated NH4Cl is added. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc, and the combined organic layer is dried and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by PTLC to give the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.47 (s, 1H), 7.47-7.35. (d, 2H), 7.32-7.26 (d, 2H), 4.48 (b, 1H), 4.05 (s, 2H), 1.57 (s, 6H). m/z: 372.9.
    • STEP 5. 4,5-BIS-(4-CHLOROPHENYL)-2-(4,4-DIMETHYL-1,1-DIOXIDO-1,2,5]-THIADIAZOLIDIN-2-YL)-PYRIMIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00128
  • 4-Chloro-5-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-(4,4-dimethyl-1,1-dioxido-1,2,5-thiadiazolidin-2-yl)-pyrimidine (50 mg, 0.13 mmol), 4-chlorophenylboroic acid (24 mg, 0.15 mmol), K2CO3 (28 mg, 0.2 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (2 mg) are dissolved in degassed dioxane (1.5 mL) and H2O (0.3 mL). The reaction mixture is heated to 100° C. for 14 h. EtOAc is added to the reaction mixture. The organic layer is evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by PTLC to give the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.52 (s, 1H), 7.48-7.28. (m, 6H), 7.10-7.07 (d, 2H), 4.54 (b, 1H), 4.10 (s, 2H), 1.58 (s, 6H).
    • Example 50 SYNTHESIS OF 1-[5-(4-CHLORO-PHENYL)-4-(2-CHLORO-PHENYL)-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL]-3-ISOPROPYL-IMIDAZOLIDIN-2-ONE STEP 1. N-[5-(4-CHLORO-PHENYL)-4-(2-CHLORO-PHENYL)-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL]-N′-ISOPROPYL-ETHANE-1,2-DIAMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00129
  • A mixture of 2,4-dichloro-5-(4-chlorophenyl)pyrimidine (300 mg, 1.15 mmol), N′1′-isopropyl-ethane-1,2-diamine (118 mg, 1.15 mmol) and K2CO3 (482 mg, 3.47 mmol) in CH3CN (10 mL) is stirred at 30° C. overnight. The mixture is diluted with EtOAc, washed with water, and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by silica gel column with EtOAc/Hexane (1:1) to give the title compound as the more polar product.
    • STEP 2. 1-[5-(4-CHLORO-PHENYL)-4-(2-CHLORO-PHENYL)-PYRIMIDIN-2-YL]-3-ISOPROPYL-IMIDAZOLIDIN-2-ONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00130
  • A mixture of N-[5-(4-chloro-phenyl)-4-(2-chloro-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-yl]-N′-isopropyl-ethane-1,2-diamine (12.5 mg, 0.03 mmol), 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (25 mg, 0.15 mmol) and CsCO3 (20 mg, 0.06 mmol) in CH3CN (1 mL) is heated at 80° C. overnight. The mixture is cooled, diluted with water (1 mL) and 1 N NaOH (0.5 mL), and extracted with EtOAc (2 mL). The extract is washed once with water and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.68 (s, 1H), 7.27-7.31 (m, 4H), 7.21 (d, 2H), 7.00 (d, 2H), 4.36 (m, 1H), 4.07 (t, 2H), 3.43 (t, 2H), and 1.21 (d, 6H).
    • Example 51 SYNTHESIS OF [6-(2-CHLORO-4-METHOXY-PHENYL)-3-(1-ETHYL-PROPOXY)-5-(4-FLUORO-PHENYL)-PYRIDIN-2-YL]-METHYL-AMINE STEP 1. 2-CHLORO-3-(1-ETHYL-PROPOXY)-6-IODO-PYRIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00131
  • To a solution of 2-chloro-3-pyridinol (23.4 g, 0.18 mol) in Na2CO3 (225 mL, 1.0 m aqueous solution, 0.225 mol) is added 12 (45.8 g, 0.18 mol) and the resulting mixture is stirred overnight to dissolve all I2 and form a white solid precipitate. The mixture is then diluted with EtOAc and acidified with concentrated HCl to pH 2-3. The mixture is extracted with EtOAc (100 mL×3) and the combined extracts are washed with H2O, dried, evaporated to give a yellow solid. The solid is then dissolved in DMF (300 ml). To this solution is added solid K2CO3 (40 g) and 3-bromopentane (44.8 ml, 2 eq). The resulting mixture is heated to 90° C. (gentle reflux) for 24 h, then cooled to rt, poured into 5% EtOAc/hexane (500 mL), washed with H2O (100 mL) several times, and dried over Na2SO4. Solvent is removed to give the product as an oil, which is used in the next step.
    • STEP 2. [3-(1-ETHYL-PROPOXY)-6-IODO-PYRIDIN-2-YL]-METHYL-AMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00132
  • Crude 2-chloro-3-(1-ethyl-propoxy)-6-iodo-pyridine (40 g) is dissolved in CH3NH2 (4N in NMP, 85 ml, 3 eq) and sealed and heated to 100° C. for 2 days. The mixture is then diluted with 5% EtOAc in hexane, washed with H2O several times and dried. Solvent is removed to give a dark green oil. Crystals form on cooling. The mixture of oil and crystals is filtered. The solid is washed with hexane, dried to give the title compound as a light green crystalline solid. The filtrate is collected to give an oil which is purified by column (3% EtOAc/hexane) to give additional solid title compound.
    • STEP 3. [5-BROMO-3-(1-ETHYL-PROPOXY)-6-IODO-PYRIDIN-2-YL]-METHYL-AMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00133
  • To a solution of the solid from step 2, (3.47 g, 10.83 mmol) in CHCl3 (40 ml) is added NBS (2.12 g, 11.9 mmol) at 0° C., warmed to rt, stirred for 20 min, and then evaporated to remove CHCl3. 6% EtOAc in hexane is added into the residue and washed with sat. NaHCO3 and H2O, dried and evaporated. The formed crystals are collected by filtration. The solid is washed with hexane, and dried to give the title compound, which is then purified by column (1% EtOAc in hexane).
    • STEP 4. [5-BROMO-6-(2-CHLORO-4-METHOXY-PHENYL)-3-(1-ETHYL-PROPOXY)-PYRIDIN-2-YL]-METHYL-AMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00134
  • This compound is prepared from 2-chloro-4-methoxy-phenylboronic acid and [5-bromo-3-(1-ethyl-propoxy)-6-iodo-pyridin-2-yl]-methyl-amine according to the procedure given in Example 4, step 1.
    • STEP 5. [6-(2-CHLORO-4-METHOXY-PHENYL)-3-(1-ETHYL-PROPOXY)-5-(4-FLUORO-PHENYL)-PYRIDIN-2-YL]-METHYL-AMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00135
  • This compound is prepared from 4-fluoro-phenylboronic acid and [5-bromo-6-(2-chloro-4-methoxy-phenyl)-3-(1-ethyl-propoxy)-pyridin-2-yl]-methyl-amine according to the procedure given in Example 4, step 2.
    • Example 52 SYNTHESIS OF 3-(ETHYLAMINO)-1-{5-(3-CHLOROPYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]-1,2,4-TRIAZIN-3-YL}AZETIDINE-3-CARBOXAMIDE STEP 1. 1-(3-CHLOROPYRIDIN-4-YL)-2-[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]ETHANOL
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00136
  • An oven-dried round bottom flask is charged with zinc (4.29 g, 65.6 mmol) and 20 mL of anhydrous THF. To this flask is added 0.2 mL of 1,2-dibromoethane, and the reaction mixture is heated at 66° C. A solution of 4-trifluoromethylbenzyl bromide (10.8 g, 45 mmol) and 1,2-dibromoethane (0.2 mL) in THF (25 mL) is added slowly via cannula. After stirring for 1 h at 66° C., the reaction mixture is cooled to rt, and then is added into a solution of 3-chloro-4-pyridinecarboxaldehyde (5.1 g, 36 mmol) in THF (60 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture is allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 5 h at rt before it is quenched with the addition of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride. The organic layer is separated, and the aqueous layer is back extracted with EtOAc (150 mL×2). The combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. Purification of the residue by flash column chromatography (50% EtOAc in hexanes) affords the title compound as a yellow solid.
    • STEP 2. 1-(3-CHLOROPYRIDIN-4-YL)-2-[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]ETHANE-1,2-DIONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00137
  • To a solution of 5.89 g of 1-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-2-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]ethanol (8.0 mmol) in DCM (80 mL), is added Dess-Martin Periodinane (4.13 g, 19.5 mmol). After stirring for 1 h at rt, the reaction is quenched with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and Na2S2O3 solution. The organic layer is separated, and the aqueous layer is back extracted with DCM (60 mL×2). The combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. Purification of the residue by flash column chromatography (30% EtOAc in hexanes) affords 1-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-2-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]ethanone as a yellow solid.
  • To a solution of 3.4 g of 1-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-2-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]ethanone (11.34 mmol) in 1,4-dioxine (80 ml) and water (6 mL), is added 3.1 g of selenium dioxide (28.35 mmol). The reaction mixture is heated under reflux for 16 h. After being cooled to rt, the reaction mixture is diluted with EtOAc and water. The organic layer is separated, and the aqueous layer is back extracted with EtOAc (50 mL×2). The combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. Purification of the residue by flash column chromatography (30% EtOAc in hexanes) affords the title compound as a yellow solid.
    • STEP 3. 3-CHLORO-5-(3-CHLOROPYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]-1,2,4-TRIAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00138
  • To a solution of 117 mg of 1-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-2-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]ethane-1,2-dione (0.373 mmol) in 3 mL of DMA, is added 43.7 mg of semicarbazide hydrochloride (0.392 mmol) and 276.4 mg of potassium carbonate (2 mmol). The reaction mixture is heated at 160° C. for 16 h. After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture is diluted with EtOAc and water. The aqueous layer is separated, and then neutralized with aqueous ammonium chloride. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (25 mL×3). The combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated to give essentially pure cyclized products as a mixture of two regio-isomers. The cyclized products are dissolved in 3 mL of phosphorus oxychloride, and 21.5 mg of N,N-diethylaniline is added. The resulting mixture is heated at 105° C. for 16 h. After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture is carefully poured into ice-water. The aqueous solution is neutralized with 1 N aqueous NaOH and extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. Purification of the residue by PTLC (20% EtOAc in hexanes) affords 3-chloro-5-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-6-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2,4-triazine and 3-chloro-6-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-5-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2,4-triazine.
  • 3-chloro-5-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-6-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2,4-triazine: LC-MS: m/z for C15H7Cl2F3N4 expected 370.0 (35Cl), 372.0 (37Cl), 374.0 (37Cl×2); found 371.00 (MH+), 372.99 (MH+), 374.99 (MH+). 1H-NMR ( δ, ppm, CDCl3 as internal standard): 8.70 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 1H), 8.64 (s, 1H), 7.64 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.60 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.48 (d, J=5.1 Hz, 1H).
  • 3-chloro-6-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-5-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2,4-triazine: LC-MS: m/z for C15H7Cl2F3N4 expected 370.0 (35Cl), 372.0 (37Cl), 374.0 (37Cl×2); found 371.00 (MH+), 373.00 (MH+), 375.00 (MH+). 1H-NMR (δ, ppm, CDCl3 as internal standard): 8.75 (d, J=5.1 Hz, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H), 7.67 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 2H), 7.64 (d, J=5.1 Hz, 1H), 7.63 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 2H).
    • STEP 4. 3-(ETHYLAMINO)-1-{5-(3-CHLOROPYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]-1,2,4-TRIAZIN-3-YL}AZETIDINE-3-CARBOXAMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00139
  • To a solution of 15 mg of 3-chloro-5-(3-chloropyridin-4-yl)-6-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2,4-triazine (0.04 mmol) in 1 mL of acetonitrile, is added 10.8 mg of 3-(ethylamino)azetidine-3-carboxamide (acetic acid salt, 0.06 mmol) and 33.2 mg of potassium carbonate (0.24 mmol). The resulting mixture is heated at 80° C. for 16 h. After being cooled to rt, the mixture is diluted with EtOAc and water. The organic layer is separated, and the aqueous layer is back extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated. Purification of the residue by PTLC (5% MeOH in DCM) affords the title compound. LC-MS: m/z for C21H19ClF3N7O expected 477.13 (35Cl), 479.13 (37Cl); found 478.19 (MH+), 480.16 (MH+). 1H-NMR (δ, ppm, CDCl3 as internal standard): 8.60 (d, J=4.8 Hz, 1H), 8.59 (s, 1H), 7.53 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.45 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.32 (d, J=5.1 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (m, 1H), 5.54 (m, 1H), 4.75-4.73 (m, 2H), 4.18-4.11 (m, 2H), 2.67 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.20 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
    • Example 53 SYNTHESIS OF 4-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY]-PIPERIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER AND DERIVATIVES THEREOF STEP 1. 5-BROMO-6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YLAMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00140
  • 6-Chloro-2-aminopyrazine (21.6 g, 166.7 mmol) in 200 ml of CHCl3 is treated with NBS (30 g, 168.4 mmol) at 0° C. in portions over 1.5 h. The reaction mixture is stirred for another 2 h and quenched by the addition of 100 ml water. The aqueous layer is extracted with CHCl3 (3×100 ml). The combined organic layer is washed with sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column to give the title compound. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 7.68 (s, 1H), 4.78 (2H, b); LC-MS: expected 208.44 (35Cl), found 209.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 2. 5-BROMO-6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-OL
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00141
  • 5-Bromo-6-chloro-2-aminopyrazine (2.08 g, 10 mmol) is dissolved in 16 ml concentrated H2SO4 and cooled to 0° C. Sodium nitrite (700 mg, 10 mmol) is added to the reaction mixture portionwise over 30 min, and stirring is continued for another 15 min. The sticky reaction mixture is slowly added to 100 g ice. The precipitate is collected by filtration and washed to acid-free to give the title compound as an off white solid. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 11.8 (b, 1H), 7.80 (1H, s); LC-MS: expected 209.43 (35Cl), found 210.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 3. 4-(5-BROMO-6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY)-PIPERIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00142
  • A mixture of 5-bromo-6-chloro-pyrazin-2-ol (1.4 g, 7 mmol), triphenylphosphine (2.2 g, 8.4 mmol) and 1-N-Boc-4-hydroxypiperdine (1.7 g, 8.4 mmol) in 20 ml THF is treated with DEAD (3.66 ml, 8.4 mmol, 40% in toluene) dropwise over 15 min. The reaction mixture is stirred overnight, concentrated, and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound as white solid. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 7.80 (1H, s), 5.15 (1H, m), 3.74(2H, m), 3.31(2H, m), 1.97 (2H, m), 1.73 (2H, m), 1.47 (9H, s); LC-MS: expected 392.68, found 293.7 (MH+).
    • STEP 4. 4-[6-CHLORO-5-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY]-PIPERIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00143
  • 4-(5-Bromo-6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yloxy)-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (1.1 g, 2.8 mmol), 4-trifluoromethylphenylboronic acid (0.47 g, 3.36 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (64 mg, 2 mol %) in 25 ml 1,4-dioxone is treated with 4.2 ml of 2M K2CO3 (8.4 mmol). The reaction mixture is heated to reflux for 2 h. After cooling, the reaction mixture is diluted with 100 ml EtOAc. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (2×20 ml). The combined organic layer is washed with sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 7.80 (1H, s), 5.15 (1H, m), 3.74(2H, m), 3.31(2H, m), 1.97 (2H, m), 1.73 (2H, m), 1.47 (9H, s); LC-MS: expected 392.68, found 293.7 (MH+).
    • STEP 5. 4-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY]-PIPERIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00144
  • 4-[6-Chloro-5-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrazin-2-yloxy]-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (1.1 g, 2.5 mmol), 3-chloro-pyridyl-4-boronic acid (1.3 g, 7.5 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (64 mg, 2 mol %) in 25 ml 1,4-dioxone is treated with 6.5 ml of 2M K2CO3 (12.5 mmol). The reaction mixture is heated to 135° C. in a sealed tube overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture is diluted with 100 ml EtOAc. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (2×20 ml). The combined organic layer is washed with sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound. LC-MS: expected 534.96 (35Cl), found 535.3 (MH+).
  • The Boc group may be replaced with a variety of moieties using, for example, the methods described in Examples 6 and 7.
    • Example 54 SYNTHESIS OF 3-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY]-AZETIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER AND DERIVATIVES THEREOF STEP 1. 6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLAMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00145
  • 6-Chloro-2-aminopyrazine (7.8 g, 60 mmol), 3-chloro-pyridyl-4-boronic acid (14 g, 0.18 mol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (2 g, 5 mol %) in 180 ml of 1,4-dioxone is treated with 150 ml of 2M K2CO3 (0.3 mol). The reaction mixture is heated to 135° C. in a sealed tube overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture is diluted with 250 ml EtOAc. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (2×100 ml). The combined organic layer is washed with sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.58 (1H, d, J=4 Hz)), 8.34 (1H, s), 8.04 (1H, s), 7.53 (1H, m), 4.72 (2H, b); LC-MS: expected 206.63 (35Cl), found 207.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 2. 5-BROMO-6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLAMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00146
  • 6-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazin-2-ylamine (4.5 g, 21.8 mmol) in 100 ml of CHCl3 is treated with NBS (3.9 g, 22 mmol) at 0° C. portionwise over 1.5 h. The reaction mixture is stirred for another 2 h and quenched by the addition of 100 ml water. The aqueous layer is extracted with CHCl3 (3×100 ml). The combined organic layer is washed with sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column to give the title compound. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.58 (1H, d, J=4 Hz)), 8.04 (1H, s), 7.53 (1H, m), 4.72 (2H, b); LC-MS: expected 285.53 (35Cl), found 286.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 3. 6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLAMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00147
  • 5-Bromo-6-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazin-2-ylamine (1.2 g, 4.2 mmol), 4-trifluoromethylphenylboronic acid (0.77 g, 4.62 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (97 mg, 2 mol %) in 25 ml 1,4-dioxone is treated with 5 ml of 2M K2CO3 (10 mmol). The reaction mixture is heated to reflux for 2 h. After cooling, the reaction mixture is diluted with 100 ml EtOAc. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (2×20 ml). The combined organic layer is washed with sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.56 (s, 1H), 8.51 (1H, d, J=4 Hz), 8.15 (1H, s), 7.26 (2H, m), 6.92 (2H, m), 4.71 (2H, b); LC-MS: expected 350.73 (35Cl), found 351.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 4. 5-CHLORO-3-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-2-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00148
  • 6-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrazin-2-ylamine (1 g, 2.85 mmol) and copper chloride (I) in 8 ml of concentrated HCl is treated with sodium nitrite (0.24 g, 3.42 mmol) at 0° C. portionwise over 30 min. The reaction mixture is stirred for another 1 h at 0° C. and 2 h at rt. The reaction is quenched by the addition of 25 ml of ice water and the pH is adjusted to 8 by 2N NaOH. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (3×60 ml). The combined organic layer is dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.74 (s, 1H), 8.58 (2H, t, J=4 Hz), 7.36 (2H, m), 7.0 (2H, m); LC-MS: expected 370.16 (35Cl), found 371.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 5. 3-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YLOXY]-AZETIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00149
  • 1-N-Boc-3-Hydroxyazetedine (0.21 g, 1.2 mmol) in 5 ml THF is treated with NaH (60 mg, 1.5 mmol, 60%). The reaction mixture is stirred for 30 min at rt, followed by the addition of 5-chloro-3-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-2-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrazine (0.37, 1 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight and quenched by the addition of 10 ml 1M sat. NH4Cl. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (3×25 ml). The combined organic layer is dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column to give the title compound. LC-MS: expected 506.93 (35Cl), found 506.9 (MH+).
  • The Boc group may be replaced with a variety of moieties using, for example, the methods described in Examples 6 and 7.
    • Example 55 SYNTHESIS OF 3-[5-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRIDAZIN-3-YLOXY]-AZETIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER AND RELATED COMPOUNDS STEP 1. 3-CHLORO-4-METHYLPYRIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00150
  • Diisopropylamine (25 ml, 185 mmol) in 200 ml THF is treated with 78 ml of n-BuLi (2.5M, 202.4 mmol) at −78° C. The reaction mixture is stirred for another 30 min. 3-Chloropyridine (20 g, 176 mmol) in 100 ml THF is added to the reaction mixture over 1.5 h, followed by the addition of 25 ml iodomethane in 80 ml of THF. The reaction mixture is stirred for another 1 h before quenching by the addition of 200 ml 1M HCl. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (3×150 ml). The combined organic layer is dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column to give the title compound as an oil. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.50 (s, 1H), 8.35 (1H, d, J=2 Hz), 7.14 (1H, d J=2 Hz), 2.27 (3H, s); LC-MS: expected 127.57 (35Cl), 129.57 (37Cl); found 128.3 (MH+), 130.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 2. 1-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-2-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-ETHANONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00151
  • To a solution of 3-chloro-4-methylpyridine (8 g, 62.7 mmol) in 100 ml THF is added 0.5M potassium hexamethyldisilizane (69 mmol, 138 ml) at −50° C. over 10 min. The reaction mixture is stirred for another 30 min. Trifluoromethylbenzoate ethyl ester (14 g, 69 mmol) in 60 ml of THF is added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture is stirred overnight and quenched by the addition of 100 ml 1M HCl. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (3×100 ml). The combined organic layer is dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column to give the title compound as an oil. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.48 (1H, d, J=2 Hz), 8.14 (2H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.80 (2H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.21 (1H, d, J=2 Hz), 4.46 (2H, s); LC-MS: expected 299.68 (35Cl), found 300.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 3. 4-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-4-OXO-3-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-BUTYRIC ACID ETHYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00152
  • 1-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-2-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone (4.7 g, 15.72 mmol) in 80 ml of DMSO is treated with NaH (880 mg, 60%, 22.5 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction is stirred for 1 h at rt and BrCH2CO2Et (2.26 ml, 20 mmol) is slowly added. The reaction is stirred for another 5 h and quenched by the addition of 100 ml of 1M HCl. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (3×100 ml). The combined organic layer is dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column to give the title compound as an oil. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.38 (1H, d, J=4 Hz), 8.04 (2H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.09 (1H, d, J=4 Hz), 5.52 (1H, dd, J=4, 12 Hz), 4.14 (2H, m), 3.28 (1H, dd, J=12, 20 HZ), 2.69 (1H, dd, J=4, 12 Hz); LC-MS: expected 385.76 (35Cl), found 386.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 4. 5-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-4,5-DIHYDRO-2H-PYRIDAZIN-3-ONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00153
  • 4-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-4-oxo-3-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-butyric acid ethyl ester (3.6 g, 9.35 mmol) in 10 ml of tert-amyl alcohol is treated with anhydrous hydrazine (0.3 ml, 9.35 mmol) at 90° C. The reaction mixture is stirred for 24 h and concentrated at 180° C. under vacuum. The residue is dissolved in EtOAc (100 ml), washed with sat. NH4Cl, followed by sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound as an oil. NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.87 (s, 1H), 8.69 (1H, s), 8.04 (1H, d, J=4 Hz), 7.70 (2H, d, J=8 Hz), 7.62 (2H, d, J=8 Hz), 6.68 (1H, d, J=4 Hz), 4.48 (1H, m), 3.04 (1H, m), 2.88 (1H, m); LC-MS: expected 353.73 (35Cl), found 354.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 5. 5-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRIDAZIN-3-OL
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00154
  • 5-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-6-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-4,5-dihydro-2H-pyridazin-3-one (1.6 g, 4.52 mmol) in 20 ml acetic acid is heated to 70° C. and treated with bromine (0.465 ml, 9.04 mmol). The reaction is stirred for 24 h and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is dissolved in EtOAc (100 ml), washed with sat. Na2CO3, followed by sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound as a white solid. LC-MS: expected 353.73 (35Cl), found 354.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 6. 6-CHLORO-4-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-3-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRIDAZINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00155
  • 5-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-6-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridazin-3-ol (1.5 g, 4.26 mmol) is dissolved in 15 ml trichlorophosphine oxide and heated to reflux overnight. The reaction mixture is concentrated and the residue is dissolved in water. pH is adjusted to 7 by the addition of 5N NaOH. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (3×60 ml). The combined organic layer is dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound. LC-MS: expected 370.16 (35Cl), found 371.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 7A. 4-[5-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRIDAZIN-3-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00156
  • 6-Chloro-4-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-3-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridazine (0.37 g, 1 mmol) and N-bocpiperazine (0.19 g, 1.02 mmol), in 2 ml DMSO and 2 ml of DMA, is treated with KF (0.11, 2 mmol) at 85° C. The reaction is stirred for 16 h. The mixture is then diluted with 60 ml EtOAc, washed with sat. NH4Cl, followed by sat. brine, dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column chromatography to give the title compound. LC-MS: expected 519.93, found 521.3 (MH+).
    • STEP 7B. {1-[5-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRIDAZIN-3-YL]-PIPERIDIN-4-YL}-CARBAMIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00157
  • This compound is prepared from 6-Chloro-4-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-3-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridazine and tert-butyl piperidin-4-ylcarbamate, as described in Step 7A. LC-MS: expected 533.93, found 535.1 (MH+).
    • STEP 7C. 3-[5-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-6-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRIDAZIN-3-YLOXY]-AZETIDINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00158
  • 1-N-Boc-3-Hydroxyazetedine (0.21 g, 1.2 mmol) in 5 ml THF is treated with NaH (60 mg, 1.5 mmol, 60%). The reaction mixture is stirred for 30 min at rt, followed by the addition of 6-chloro-4-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-3-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyridazine (0.37, 1 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight and quenched by the addition of 10 ml 1M sat. NH4Cl. The aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc (3×25 ml). The combined organic layer is dried over MgSO4, concentrated and purified by column to give the title compound. LC-MS: expected 506.9, found 507.3 (MH+).
    • Example 56 SYNTHESIS OF 3′-CHLORO-6-(4-PROPIONYPIPERAZIN-1-YL)-3-[4-(TRIFLOUROMETHYL)PHENYL]-[2,4′]-BIPYRIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00159
    • STEP 1. PREPARATION OF 4-(6-BROMO-PYRIDIN-2-YL)-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • A mixture of 2,6-dibromo-pyridine (1.0 g, 4.2 mmol), 4-tert-butylcarboxylate-piperazine (0.78 g, 4.2 mmol) and K2CO3 (0.69 g, 5.0 mmol) in DMA (20 mL) is heated at 120° C. for 14 h. The reaction mixture is cooled. H2O and EtOAc are added. The organic layer is separated. EtOAc is extracted (2×30 mL). The combined organic layer is dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude product is used without further purification in the next step.
    • STEP 2. PREPARATION OF 4-(3′-CHLORO-[2,4]-BIYRIDINYL-6-YL)-PIPERAZINE-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • A mixture of 4-(6-bromo-pyridin-2-yl)-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (1.44 g, 4.2 mmol), 3-chloro-4-pyridynboronic acid (2.0 g, 12.6 mmol), K2CO3 (3.5 g, 25.2 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (500 mg, 2% mmol) is dissolved in degassed dioxane (25 mL)/H2O (12 mL) and heated to 135° C. for 16 h. The reaction mixture is cooled. The crude product is purified by flash column and eluted with 1% MeOH/DCM to give the title compound.
    • STEP 3. PREPARATION OF 4-(3-BROMO-3′-CHLORO-[2,4′]-BIPYRIDINYL-6-YL)-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • 4-(3′-chloro-[2,4]-bipyridinyl-6-yl)-piperazine-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (0.98 g, 2.61 mmol) is dissolved in CHCl3 (15 mL) and cooled to 0° C. NBS (445 mg, 2.5 mmol) is added portionwise and the mixture is warmed to rt and stirred for 14 h. The crude product is purified by a flash column and eluted with 1% MeOH/DCM to give the title compound.
    • STEP 4. PREPARATION OF 4-[3′-CHLORO-3-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-[2,4′]-BIPYRIDINY-6-YL]-PIPERAZINE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID TERT-BUTYL ESTER
  • A mixture of 4-(3-bromo-3′-chloro-[2,4′]bipyridinyl-6-yl)-piperazine-1-carboxyic acid tert-butyl ester (500 mg, 1.1 mmol), 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenylboronic acid (228 mg, 1.2 mmol), K2CO3 (346 mg, 2.5 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (50 mg, 5% mmol) is dissolved in degassed dioxane (10 mL)/H2O (1.3 mL) and heated to 100° C. for 14 h. The reaction mixture is cooled. The crude product is purified by PTLC and eluted with 1% MeOH/DCM to give the title compound.
    • STEP 5. PREPARATION OF 3′-CHLORO-6-PIPERAZIN-1-YL-3-(4-TRIFLOUROMETHYL-PHENYL)-[2,4′]-BIPYRIDINE
  • 4-[3′-Chloro-3-(4-triflouromethyl-phenyl)-[2,4′]bipyridiny-6-yl]-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (470 mg. 0.9 mmol) is dissolved in DCM (7.5 mL) at rt. TFA (1 mL) is added dropwise and the mixture is stirred for 6 h. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure. EtOAc is added and the solution is washed with NaHCO3 (2×10 mL) and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure to give the title compound, which is used in the next step without further purification.
    • STEP 6. PREPARATION OF 3′-CHLORO-6-(4-PROPIONYPIPERAZIN-1-YL)-3-[4-(TRIFLOUROMETHYL)PHENYL]-[2,4′]-BIPYRIDINE
  • 3′-Chloro-6-piperazin-1-yl-3-(4-triflouromethyl-phenyl)-[2,4′]-bipyridine (10 mg, 0.024 mmol) is dissolved in DCM at rt. DIEA (0.1 mL, excess) is added and the reaction is stirred for 5 min. Propionyl chloride (2 drops) is added and the reaction is stirred for 1 h at rt, purified by PTLC and eluted with 0.5% MeOH/DCM to give the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.54 (s, 1H), 8.42-8.40 (d, 1H), 7.65-6.62 (d, 1H), 7.47-7.44 (d, 2H), 7.18-7.16 (m, 3H), 6.83-6.80 (d, 1H), 3.79-3.71 (m, 4H), 3.62-3.57 (m, 4H), 2.41-2.39 (q, 2H), 1.21-1.15 (t, 3H). m/z: 474.0.
    • Example 57 SYNTHESIS OF 3′-CHLORO-2-(1,1-DIOXIDOTHIOMORPHOLIN-4-YL)-5-[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]-4,4′-BIPYRIDINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00160
    • STEP 1. PREPARATION OF 2,3′-DICHLORO 4,4′-BIPYRIDINE
  • A mixture of 2-chloro-4-iodo-pyridine (1.0 g, 4.2 mmol), 3-chloropyridine-4-boronic acid (2.0 g, 12.7 mmol), Na2CO3 (2.7 g, 25 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (0.2 g), dioxane (30 mL) and water (15 mL) in a sealed tube is purged with argon gas for 15 min, and stirred at 130° C. overnight. The mixture is cooled, diluted with water and 1 N NaOH, and extracted with EtOAc. The extract is washed once with water and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by silica gel column (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. LC-MS; Rt=1.38 minute. mass expected (225.08), mass found (226.93, M+1).
    • STEP 2. PREPARATION OF 3′-CHLORO-2-THIOMORPHOLIN-4-YL-4,4′-BIPYRIDINE
  • A mixture of 2,3′-dichloro-4,4′-bipyridine (1.2 g, 5.3 mmol), thiomorpholine (1.1 g, 10.6 mmol) and K2CO3 (1.5 g, 10.6 mmol) in DMA (15 mL) is stirred at 140° C. overnight. The mixture is cooled, and diluted with water. The product is collected by filtration and dried. LC-MS; Rt=1.49 minute. mass expected (291.80), mass found (292.43, M+1).
    • STEP 3. PREPARATION OF 5-BROMO-3′-CHLORO-2-THIOMORPHOLIN-4-YL-4,4′-BIPYRIDINE
  • A mixture of 3′-chloro-2-thiomorpholin-4-yl-4,4′-bipyridine (1.3 g, 4.5 mmol) and NBS (478 mg, 2.7 mmol) in CHCl3 (25 mL) is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is washed with diluted aqueous Na2CO3 solution and brine, dried, concentrated under vacuum, and purified by flash column chromatography using Hexane/EtOAc (4:1) to afford the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.71 (s, 1H), 8.57 (d, 1H), 8.33 (s, 1H), 7.20 (d, 1H), 6.45 (s, 1H), 3.95 (m, 4H), 2.67 (m, 4H).
    • STEP 4. PREPARATION OF 5-BROMO-3′-CHLORO-2-(1,1-DIOXOTHIOMORPHOLIN-4-YL)-4,4′-BIPYRIDINE
  • A mixture of 5-bromo-3′-chloro-2-thiomorpholin-4-yl-4,4′-bipyridine (320 mg, 0.86 mmol) and m-CPBA (77%, 386 mg, 1.72 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed with aqueous Na2CO3 and water, and concentrated to give the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.60 (d, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 7.18 (d, 1H), 6.60 (s, 1H), 4.17 (m, 4H), 3.07 (m, 4H).
    • STEP 5. PREPARATION OF 3′-CHLORO-2-(1,1-DIOXIDOTHIOMORPHOLIN4-YL)-5-[4-(TRIFLUOROMETHYL)PHENYL]-4,4′-BIPYRIDINE
  • A mixture of 5-bromo-3′-chloro-2-(1,1-dioxothiomorpholin-4-yl)-4,4′-bipyridine (30 mg, 0.74 mmol), 4-(trifluoromethyl)benzeneboronic acid (14 mg, 0.74 mmol), Na2CO3 (16 mg, 0.15 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (3 mg), dioxane (0.5 mL) and water (0.1 mL) in a sealed tube is purged with argon gas for 10 min, and stirred at 90° C. overnight. The mixture is cooled, diluted with water and 1 N NaOH, and extracted with EtOAc. The extract is washed once with water and concentrated under vacuum. The residue is purified by PTLC (5% MeOH in CH2Cl2) to produce the title compound. 1H NMR (CDCl3): 8.59 (s, 1H), 8.43 (d, 1H), 8.32 (s, 1H), 7.49 (d, 2H), 7.18 (d, 2H), 7.03 (d, 1H), 6.67 (s, 1H), 4.25 (m, 4H), 3.12 (m, 4H). LC-MS; Rt=1.32 minute. Mass expected (467.07); mass found (468.29, M+1).
    • Example 58 SYNTHESIS OF N-{1-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-4-YL}-N-METHYL-ISOBUTYRAMIDE AND RELATED COMPOUNDS STEP 1. SYNTHESIS OF 1-(6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-PIPERIDIN-4-OL
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00161
  • A mixture of 2,6-dichloro-pyrazine (5 g, 0.0336 mol), 4-hydroxypiperazine (3.4 g, 0.0336 mol) and N,N-diisopropylethyl amine (DIPEA) (8.67 g, 0.0672 mol) in CH3CN (80 mL) is stirred under N2 for 5 h and concentrated to dryness. The residue is dissolved in EtOAc (200 mL). The solution is washed with sat. Na2CO3, and then with brine, and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gives the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 7.989 (1H, s), 7.769 (1H, s), 3.9984.057 (3H, m), 3.278-3.343 (2H, m), 1.955-2.039 (2H, m), 1.581-1.646 (3H, m). LC-MS: m/z expected 213.07, found 213.97 (MH+).
    • STEP 2. SYNTHESIS OF 2-[1-(6-CHLORO-PYRAZIN-2-YL)-PIPERIDIN-4-YL]-ISOINDOLE-1,3-DIONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00162
  • To a solution of 1-(6-chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-piperidin-4-ol (14.5 g, 0.0679 mol), phthalimide (10 g, 0.0679 mol) and triphenylphosphine (21.3 g, 0.0814 mol) in THF (200 mL) is added diisopropyl azodicarboxylate over a period of 10 min with an ice/water bath cooling. The mixture is stirred at 0° C. to rt for 2 h. The solid is filtered to give the first yield of product as a white solid. Mother liquor is concentrated to a half of original volume and stirred in an ice/water bath for 30 min. The precipitate is collected to afford a second yield of product. 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.031 (1H, s), 7.812-7.843(2H, m), 7.710-7.731 (2H, m), 7.258 (1H, s), 4.4934.532 (2H, m), 4.40 (1H, m), 3.013 (2H, m), 2.50-2.55 (2H, m), 1.826-1.856(2H, m).
    • STEP 3. SYNTHESIS OF 2-{1-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-4-YL}-ISOINDOLE-1,3-DIONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00163
  • To a solution of 3-chloropyridine (2.62 g, 0.023 mol) in THF (250 mL) is added lithium diisopropylamide (14 mL, 1.8 M in THF, 0.0252 mol) at −78° C. The solution is stirred at the same temperature for 1 h. A solution of zinc chloride in THF (50.4 mL, 0.5 M, 0.0252 mol) is added to the flask. The cooling bath is removed and the temperature is allowed to warn to rt. 2-[1-(6-Chloro-pyrazin-2-yl)-piperidin-4-yl]-isoindole-1,3-dione (3.2 g, 0.0093 mol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (1.2 g, 0.00105 mol) are added to the flask. The resulting mixture is stirred under reflux overnight, and then quenched with NH4Cl. The two layers are separated, and the aqueous layer is extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase is washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4. Column purification gives the product as an off-white solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.70 (1H, s), 8.571-8.584 (1H, m), 8.293 (1H, s), 8.248 (1H, s), 7.824-7.848 (2H, m), 7.710-7.732 (2H, m), 7.577 (1H, d), 4.605-4.639(2H, m), 4.440 (1H, m), 3.0-3.05(2H, m), 2.50-2.60 (2H, m), 1.84-1.87 (2H, d, J=10.4 Hz).
    • STEP 4. SYNTHESIS OF 2-{1-[5-BROMO-6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-4-YL}-ISOINDOLE-1,3-DIONE
  • A mixture of 2-{1-[6-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-piperidin-4-yl}-isoindole-1,3-dione (3.2 g, 7.62 mmol) and NBS (1.42 g, 8.0 mmol) in CHCl3 (250 mL) is stirred at −10° C. to 0° C. for 3 h. The reaction mixture is washed with diluted aqueous Na2CO3 solution and brine, dried and concentrated under vacuum, and purified by flash column chromatography using 10 to 25% EtOAc in hexane to afford the title compound as a white solid. LC-MS: m/z expected 499.02, found 499.86 (MH+).
    • STEP 5. SYNTHESIS OF 2-{1-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(5-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PYRIDIN-2-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-4-YL}-ISOINDOLE-1,3-DIONE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00164
  • A solution of 2-chloro-5-trifluoromethylpyridine (1.60 g, 8.8 mmol) hexamethylditin (2.88 g, 8.8 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (0.255 g, 0.22 mmol) in mesitylene (80 mL) is heated to 110° C. under nitrogen for 3 h, and then cooled. 2-{1-[5-bromo-6-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-piperidin-4-yl}-isoindole-1,3-dione (2.2 g, 4.4 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (0.51 g, 0.44 mmol) are added. The resulting mixture is stirred at 140° C. overnight. Removal of the volatiles under high vacuum gives a residue, which is column purified to yield the title compound as a pale yellow solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ 8.53-8.544 (2H, m), 8.44 (1H, s), 8.31 (1H, s), 8.067-8.088 (1H, d,) 7.890-7.917 (1H, m), 7.819-7.839 (2H, m), 7.703-7.725 (2H, m), 7.352-7.363(1H, d), 4.25(2H, d, J=14 Hz), 4.450 (1H, m), 3.054-3.115 (2H, m), 2.543-2.586 (2H, m), 1.858-1.884 (2H, d, J=10.4 Hz). LC-MS: m/z expected 564.13, found 564.98 (MH+).
    • STEP 6. SYNTHESIS OF 1-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(5-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PYRIDIN-2-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-4-YLAMINE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00165
  • To a solution of 2-{1-[6-(3-chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(5-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-piperidin-4-yl}-isoindole-1,3-dione (0.6 g, 1.06 mmol) in EtOH (20 mL) is added NH2NH2 (0.068 g, 2.12 mmol) in one portion. The resulting mixture is stirred at rt for 1.5 h. The solution is concentrated to half volume. EtOAc (20 mL) is added and the mixture is cooled to rt and filtered. Mother liquor is concentrated to almost dryness, and EtOAc (20 mL) is added again. The cloudy mixture is filtered again. Mother liquor is concentrated to dryness to afford the title compound as an off-white solid. LC-MS: m/z expected 434.12; found 435.02 (MH+).
    • STEP 7. SYNTHESIS OF N-{1-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(5-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PYRIDIN-2-YL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-4-YL}-ACETAMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00166
  • To a solution of 1-[6-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(5-trifluoromethyl-pyridin-2-yl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-piperidin-4-ylamine (44 mg, 0.1 mmol) in anhydrous DCM (2 mL) is added TEA (20 mg, 0.2 mmol), followed by acetic anhydride (15.3 mg, 0.15 mmol). The mixture is allowed to stand at rt overnight. PTLC purification gives a white solid product. MS: m/z expected 476.13; found 477.03 (MH+).
    • SYNTHESIS OF N-{1-[6-(3-CHLORO-PYRIDIN-4-YL)-5-(4-TRIFLUOROMETHYL-PHENYL)-PYRAZIN-2-YL]-PIPERIDIN-4-YL}-N-METHYL-ISOBUTYRAMIDE
  • Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00167
  • To a solution of N-{1-[6-(3-Chloro-pyridin-4-yl)-5-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-pyrazin-2-yl]-piperidin-4-yl}-isobutyramide (15 mg, 0.03 mmol—prepared essentially as described in steps 1-7 above, employing readily apparent starting materials) in anhydrous THF (1 mL) is added MeI (6.4 mg, 0.045 mmol) and t-BuOK (0.045 mL, 0.045 mmol, 1.0 M in THF). The mixture is stirred at rt for 1 h. PTLC purification gives a white solid product. MS: m/z expected 517.97; found 518.10 (MH+).
    • Example 59 Additional Representative CB1 Antagonists
  • Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein. Compounds listed in Tables I-IV are prepared using such methods. In Tables I-III, a “*” in the column headed “IC50” indicates that the IC50 at CB1, determined as described in Example 64, herein, is 2 micromolar or less. “Ret.” is the retention time in min and mass spectroscopy data generated as described above is presented as in the column headed “MS”. All mass spectroscopy data is presented as M+1 unless otherwise noted.
    LENGTHY TABLE REFERENCED HERE
    US20070078135A1-20070405-T00001
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
    LENGTHY TABLE REFERENCED HERE
    US20070078135A1-20070405-T00002
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
    LENGTHY TABLE REFERENCED HERE
    US20070078135A1-20070405-T00003
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
    LENGTHY TABLE REFERENCED HERE
    US20070078135A1-20070405-T00004
    Please refer to the end of the specification for access instructions.
    • Example 60 Baculoviral Preparations for CB1 Expression
  • This Example illustrates the preparation of recombinant baculovirus for use in generating CB1-expressing insect cells.
  • The human CB1 sequence has GenBank Accession Number HSU73304, and was reported by Hoehe et al. (1991) New Biol. 3(9):880-85. Human CB1 (hCB1) cDNA is amplified from a human brain cDNA library (Gibco BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) using PCR, in which the 5′ primer includes the optimal Kozak sequence CCACC. The resulting PCR product is cloned into pcDNA3.1/V5-His-TOPO (Invitrogen Corp, Carlsbad, Calif.) using the multiple cloning site, and then subcloned into pBACPAK8 (BD Biosciences, Palo Alto, Calif.) at the Bam/Xho site to yield a hCB1 baculoviral expression vector.
  • The hCB1 baculoviral expression vector is co-transfected along with BACULOGOLD DNA (BD PharMingen, San Diego, Calif.) into Sf9 cells. The Sf9 cell culture supernatant is harvested three days post-transfection. The recombinant virus-containing supernatant is serially diluted in Hink's TNM-FH insect medium (JRH Biosciences, Kansas City, Mo.) supplemented with Grace's salts and with 4.1 mM L-Gln, 3.3 g/L LAH, 3.3 g/L ultrafiltered yeastolate and 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (hereinafter “insect medium”) and plaque assayed for recombinant plaques. After four days, recombinant plaques are selected and harvested into 1 ml of insect medium for amplification. Each 1 ml volume of recombinant baculovirus (at passage 0) is used to infect a separate T25 flask containing 2×106 Sf9 cells in 5 ml of insect medium. After five days of incubation at 27° C., supernatant medium is harvested from each of the T25 infections for use as passage 1 inoculum.
  • Two of seven recombinant baculoviral clones are then chosen for a second round of amplification, using 1 ml of passage 1 stock to infect 1×108 cells in 100 ml of insect medium divided into 2 T175 flasks. Forty-eight hours post infection, passage 2 medium from each 100 ml preparation is harvested and plaque assayed for titer. The cell pellets from the second round of amplification are assayed by affinity binding as described below to verify recombinant receptor expression. A third round of amplification is then initiated using a multiplicity of infection of 0.1 to infect a liter of Sf9 cells. Seventy-two hours post-infection the supernatant medium is harvested to yield passage 3 baculoviral stock.
  • The remaining cell pellet is assayed for affinity binding. Radioligand is 25 pM-5.0 nM [3H]CP55,940 for saturation binding and 0.5 nM for competition binding (New England Nuclear Corp., Boston, Mass.); the hCB1-expressing baculoviral cells are used; the assay buffer contains 50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl2, 0.5% BSA and 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin; filtration is carried out using GF/C WHATMAN filters (presoaked in 0.3% non-fat dry milk (H2O) for 2 hours prior to use); and the filters are washed twice with 5 mL cold 50 mM Tris pH. 7.4.
  • Titer of the passage 3 baculoviral stock is determined by plaque assay and a multiplicity of infection, incubation time course, binding assay experiment is carried out to determine conditions for optimal receptor expression.
    • Example 61 Baculoviral Infections
  • Log-phase Sf9 cells (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, Calif.), are infected with one or more stocks of recombinant baculovirus followed by culturing in insect medium at 27° C. Infections are carried out either only with virus directing the expression of hCB1 or with this virus in combination with three G-protein subunit-expression virus stocks: 1) rat Gαt2 G-protein-encoding virus stock, 2) bovine β1 G-protein-encoding virus stock, and 3) human γ2 G-protein-encoding virus stock, all of which are obtained from Biosignal Inc., Montreal, Canada.
  • Typical hCB1 infections are conducted using Sf9 cells that are cultured in insect medium supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated fetal bovine serum (FBS) as discussed above. Higher receptor and G-protein (Gα, Gβ, Gγ) expression can be obtained if the Sf9 cells are cultured in insect medium with 5% FBS and 5% Gibco serum-free medium (Invitrogen Corp.; Carlsbad, Calif.). Maximal CB1 expression and functional activity is achieved if the Sf9 cells are cultured in insect medium without FBS and with 10% Gibco serum-free medium. The infections are carried out at a multiplicity of infection of 0.1:1.0:0.5:0.5. At 72 hours post-infection, a sample of cell suspension is analyzed for viability by trypan blue dye exclusion, and the remaining Sf9 cells are harvested via centrifugation (3000 rpm/10 min/4° C.).
    • Example 62 Purified Recombinant Insect Cell Membranes
  • Sf9 cell pellets are resuspended in homogenization buffer (10 mM HEPES, 250 mM sucrose, 0.5 μg/ml leupeptin, 2 μg/ml Aprotinin, 200 μM PMSF, and 2.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.4) and homogenized using a POLYTRON homogenizer (setting 5 for 30 seconds). The homogenate is centrifuged (536×g/10 min/4° C.) to pellet the nuclei. The supernatant containing isolated membranes is decanted to a clean centrifuge tube, centrifuged (48,000×g/30 min, 4° C.) and the resulting pellet resuspended in 30 ml homogenization buffer. This centrifugation and resuspension step is repeated twice. The final pellet is resuspended in ice cold Dulbecco's PBS containing 5 mM EDTA and stored in frozen aliquots at −80° C. until needed. The protein concentration of the resulting membrane preparation (hereinafter “P2 membranes”) is measured using a Bradford protein assay (Bio-Rad Laboratories, Hercules, Calif.). By this measure, a 1-liter culture of cells typically yields 100-150 mg of total membrane protein.
    • Example 63 Radioligand Binding Assays
  • P2 membranes are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in binding buffer (50 mM Tris pH. 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl2, 0.5% BSA and 0.2 mg/ml bacitracin).
  • For saturation binding analysis, membranes (10 μg) are added to polypropylene tubes containing 25 pM-0.5 nM [3H]CP55,940 (New England Nuclear Corp., Boston, Mass.). Nonspecific binding is determined in the presence of 10 μM CP55,940 (Tocris Cookson Inc., Ellisville, Mo.) and accounted for less than 10% of total binding. For evaluation of guanine nucleotide effects on receptor affinity, GTPγS is added to duplicate tubes at the final concentration of 50 μM.
  • For competition analysis, membranes (10 μg) are added to polypropylene tubes containing 0.5 nM [3H]CP55,940. Non-radiolabeled displacers are added to separate assays at concentrations ranging from 10−10-M to 10−5 M to yield a final volume of 0.250 mL. Nonspecific binding is determined in the presence of 10 μM CP55,940 and accounted for less than 10% of total binding. Following a one-hour incubation at rt, the reaction is terminated by rapid vacuum filtration. Samples are filtered over presoaked (0.3% non-fat dry milk for 2 hours prior to use) GF/C WHATMAN filters and rinsed 2 times with 5 mL cold 50 mM Tris pH 7.4. Remaining bound radioactivity is quantified by gamma counting. Ki and Hill coefficient (“nH”) are determined by fitting the Hill equation to the measured values with the aid of SIGMAPLOT software (SPSS Inc., Chicago, Ill.).
    • Example 64 Agonist-Induced GTP Binding
  • This Example illustrates the use of agonist-stimulated GTPγ35S binding (“GTP binding”) activity to identify CB1 agonists and antagonists, and to differentiate neutral antagonists from those that possess inverse agonist activity. This assay can also be used to detect partial agonism mediated by antagonist compounds. A compound being analyzed in this assay is referred to herein as a “test compound.” Agonist-stimulated GTP binding activity is measured as follows: Four independent baculoviral stocks (one directing the expression of hCB1 and three directing the expression of each of the three subunits of a heterotrimeric G-protein) are used to infect a culture of Sf9 cells as described in Example 61.
  • Agonist-stimulated GTP binding on purified membranes (prepared as described in Example 62) is initially assessed using the cannabinoid agonist CP55,940 to ascertain that the receptor/G-protein-alpha-beta-gamma combination(s) yield a functional response as measured by GTP binding.
  • P2 membranes are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in GTP binding assay buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl2, 2 mM EGTA, 0.1% BSA, 0.1 mM bacitracin, 100 KIU/mL aprotinin, 5 μM GDP) and added to reaction tubes at a concentration of 10 μg protein/reaction tube. After adding increasing doses of the agonist CP55,940 at concentrations ranging from 10−12 M to 10−6 M, reactions are initiated by the addition of 100 pM GTPγ35S. In competition experiments, non-radiolabeled test compounds are added to separate assays at concentrations ranging from 10−10M to 10−5 M along with 1 nM CP55,940 to yield a final volume of 0.25 mL.
  • Following a 60-minute incubation at room temperature, the reactions are terminated by vacuum filtration over GF/C filters (pre-soaked in wash buffer, 0.1% BSA) followed by washing with ice-cold wash buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.0, 120 mM NaCl). The amount of receptor-bound (and thereby membrane-bound) GTPγ35S is determined by measuring the bound radioactivity, preferably by liquid scintillation spectrometry of the washed filters. Non-specific binding is determined using 10 mM GTPγ35S and typically represents less than 5 percent of total binding. Data is expressed as percent above basal (baseline). The results of these GTP binding experiments are analyzed using SIGMAPLOT software and IC50 determined. The IC50 may then be used to generate K; as described by Cheng and Prusoff (1973) Biochem Pharmacol 22(23):3099-108.
  • Neutral antagonists are those test compounds that reduce the CP55,940-stimulated GTP binding activity towards, but not below, baseline (the level of GTP bound by membranes in this assay in the absence of added CP55,940 or other agonist and in the further absence of any test compound).
  • In contrast, in the absence of added CP55,940, CB1 inverse agonists reduce the GTP binding activity of the receptor-containing membranes below baseline. If a test compound that displays antagonist activity does not reduce the GTP binding activity below baseline in the absence of the CB1 agonist, it is characterized as a neutral antagonist.
  • An antagonist test compound that elevates GTP binding activity above baseline in the absence of added CP55,940 in this GTP binding assay is characterized as having partial agonist activity. Preferred CB1 antagonists do not elevate GTP binding activity under such conditions more than 10%, more preferably less than 5% and most preferably less than 2% of the maximal response elicited by the agonist, CP55,940.
  • The GTP binding assay can also be used to determine antagonist selectivity towards CB1 over CB2. Agonist-stimulated GTP binding activity at CB2 is measured as described above for CB1 except that the Sf9 cells are infected with one baculoviral stock directing the expression of hCB2 and three directing the expression of each of the three subunits of a heterotrimeric G-protein. The IC50 and Ki are generated as described above for CB1.
    • Example 65 Surmountability Assays
  • Certain CB1 antagonists are insurmountable with regard to the agonist induced GTPγ35s binding effect. To assess surmountability, P2 membranes are resuspended by Dounce homogenization (tight pestle) in GTP binding assay buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.4, 120 mM NaCl, 5 mM MgCl2, 2 mM EGTA, 10 μg/ml saponin, 0.1% BSA, 0.1 mM bacitracin, 100 KIU/mL aprotinin, 5 μM GDP) and added to reaction tubes at a concentration of 10 μg protein/reaction tube. Agonist dose-response curves (typically CP55,940) at concentrations ranging from 10−12 M to 10−5 M, are run either in the absence or in the presence of a test compound at one of several doses up to 100× the IC50 of the test compound as measured in the competition GTPγ35S binding. The reactions are initiated by the addition of 100 pM GTPγ35S to yield a final volume of 0.25 mL. Following a 90-minute incubation at room temperature, the reactions are terminated by vacuum filtration over GF/C filters (pre-soaked in wash buffer, 0.1% BSA) followed by washing with ice-cold wash buffer (50 mM Tris pH 7.0, 120 mM NaCl). The amount of receptor-bound (and thereby membrane-bound) GTPγ35S is determined by measuring the bound radioactivity, preferably by liquid scintillation spectrometry of the washed filters. Non-specific binding is determined using 10 μM GTPγS and typically represents less than 5 percent of total binding. Data is expressed as percent above basal (baseline). The results of these GTP binding experiments may be conveniently analyzed using SIGMAPLOT software. A surmountable test compound is one which shifts the EC50 of the agonist to the right (weaker) without affecting the maximum functional response of the agonist. Insurmountable antagonist test compounds have no significant effect on the hCB1 agonist EC50 at concentrations roughly 100× the IC50, but significantly reduce or eliminate the agonist stimulated GTPγ35S binding response of the receptor.
    • Example 66 MDCK Cytotoxicity Assay
  • This Example illustrates the evaluation of compound toxicity using a Madin Darby canine kidney (MDCK) cell cytotoxicity assay.
  • 1 μL of test compound is added to each well of a clear bottom 96-well plate (Packard, Meriden, Conn.) to give final concentration of compound in the assay of 10 μM, 100 μM or 200 μM. Solvent without test compound is added to control wells.
  • MDCK cells, ATCC no. CCL-34 (American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va.), are maintained in sterile conditions following the instructions in the ATCC production information sheet. Confluent MDCK cells are trypsinized, harvested, and diluted to a concentration of 0.1×106 cells/mL with warm (37° C.) medium (VITACELL Minimum Essential Medium Eagle, ATCC catalog # 30-2003). 100 μL of diluted cells is added to each well, except for five standard curve control wells that contain 100 μL of warm medium without cells. The plate is then incubated at 37° C. under 95% O2, 5% CO2 for 2 hours with constant shaking. After incubation, 50 μL of mammalian cell lysis solution (from the Packard (Meriden, Conn.) ATP-LITE-M Luminescent ATP detection kit) is added per well, the wells are covered with PACKARD TOPSEAL stickers, and plates are shaken at approximately 700 rpm on a suitable shaker for 2 min.
  • Compounds causing toxicity will decrease ATP production, relative to untreated cells. The ATP-LITE-M Luminescent ATP detection kit is generally used according to the manufacturer's instructions to measure ATP production in treated and untreated MDCK cells. PACKARD ATP LITE-M reagents are allowed to equilibrate to room temperature. Once equilibrated, the lyophilized substrate solution is reconstituted in 5.5 mL of substrate buffer solution (from kit). Lyophilized ATP standard solution is reconstituted in deionized water to give a 10 mM stock. For the five control wells, 10 μL of serially diluted PACKARD standard is added to each of the standard curve control wells to yield a final concentration in each subsequent well of 200 nM, 100 nM, 50 nM, 25 nM, and 12.5 nM. PACKARD substrate solution (50 μL) is added to all wells, which are then covered, and the plates are shaken at approximately 700 rpm on a suitable shaker for 2 min. A white PACKARD sticker is attached to the bottom of each plate and samples are dark adapted by wrapping plates in foil and placing in the dark for 10 min. Luminescence is then measured at 22° C. using a luminescence counter (e.g., PACKARD TOPCOUNT Microplate Scintillation and Luminescence Counter or TECAN SPECTRAFLUOR PLUS), and ATP levels calculated from the standard curve. ATP levels in cells treated with test compound(s) are compared to the levels determined for untreated cells. Cells treated with 10 μM of a preferred test compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80%, preferably at least 90%, of the untreated cells. When a 100 μM concentration of the test compound is used, cells treated with preferred test compounds exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50%, preferably at least 80%, of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
    LENGTHY TABLE
    The patent application contains a lengthy table section. A copy of the table is available in electronic form from the USPTO web site (http://seqdata.uspto.gov/?pageRequest=docDetail&DocID=US20070078135A1). An electronic copy of the table will also be available from the USPTO upon request and payment of the fee set forth in 37 CFR 1.19(b)(3).

Claims (77)

1. A compound of the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00168
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is CR1, or N;
Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 10-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA; such that at least one of Ar1 and Ar2 is an optionally substituted 5- or 6-membered heterocycle;
X is C(R9)(R10), O, N(R2) or SOmN(R2)
Y is C1-C4alkylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with one or two substituents independently chosen from RB;
Z is O(R3), S(O)m(R4), N(R4)(R5), S(O)mN(R4)(R5), C(R6)(R7) or C(R6)(R7)(R8); wherein m is 0, 1 or 2;
Each RA is independently chosen from:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and —COOH; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C1-C4alkoxy; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
or two RA groups attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms are taken together to form a fused 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RB is:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; such that if RB forms a heterocycloalkyl with R3, then the heterocycloalkyl is not substituted with C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl;
or two RB are taken together to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Each RD is independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl and aminosulfonyl; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RE is independently chosen from oxo, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl;
R1 is:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, —COOH or aminosulfonyl; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with R2 or R9 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
R2 is:
(i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
(iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; or
(iv) taken together with R1 to form an optionally substituted fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle;
R3 is:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)-C(═O)—, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, amino, C1-C6alkyl or C1-C6alkoxy; or
(iii) taken together with R2, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R4 is:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(iii) taken together with R2, R5, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R5 is:
(i) hydrogen, cyano or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, —COOH, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycle, and phenyl; or
(iii) taken together with R4 to form an optionally substituted 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
R6 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R7 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE; such that R7 is not C1-C6hydroxyalkyl; or
(iii) taken together with R6 or R8 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle;
R8 is:
(i) halogen, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(iii) taken together with R6 or R7 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle;
R9 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano or amino;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C8alkylamino, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
(iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form an optionally substituted 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle; or
(iv) taken together with R1 to form an optionally substituted, fused 5- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle; and
R10 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano or amino; or
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C8alkylamino, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE.
2. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein A is CR1.
3. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein A is N.
4. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein X is N(R2).
5. A compound or salt according to claim 4, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00169
wherein:
Each n is independently 0, 1 or 2, such that at least one n is not 0;
Q is NR5, O or SOm, wherein m is 0, 1 or 2; and
R11 represents 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from oxo, COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and groups that are taken together with R5 to form a 5- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl; or R11 represents two substituents that are taken together to form a C1-C2alkylene bridge.
6. A compound or salt according to claim 5, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00170
wherein:
R11 represents 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from oxo, COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl and mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl; and
Q is SO2, SO, S, O or NH.
7. A compound or salt according to claim 5, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00171
wherein R5 is:
(i) hydrogen or cyano; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C3-C8cycloalkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, C1-C6alkyl, aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino.
8. A compound or salt according to claim 7, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00172
wherein one of R20 and R21 is taken together with R22 or R23 to form a methylene or ethylene bridge, and those of R20, R21, R22 and R23 that do not form bridge are hydrogen.
9. (canceled)
10. A compound or salt according to claim 4, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00173
wherein:
each n is independently 0, 1 or 2;
R12 is hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C2-C4alkyl ether, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, hydroxy, C1-C4alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and
R13 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C2-C4alkyl ether and C1-C4alkanoyl; or
R12 and R13 are taken together to form a fused or spiro 5- to 7-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4hydroxyalkyl.
11. A compound or salt according to claim 4, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00174
12. A compound or salt according to claim 11, wherein R7 is hydrogen or aminocarbonyl, and R8 is mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino or C1-C6alkanoylamino.
13. (canceled)
14. A compound or salt according to claim 4, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00175
15. A compound or salt according to claim 4, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00176
16.-19. (canceled)
20. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein R1 is hydrogen, bromo, chloro, cyano, methyl, ethyl, methylamino or ethylamino.
21. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein Ar1 is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl.
22. A compound or salt according to claim 21, wherein Ar1 is pyridin-4-yl that is substituted with 1 or 2 substituents.
23. A compound or salt according to claim 21, wherein Ar1 is substituted with 1 or 2 halogens.
24. A compound or salt according to claim 23, wherein Ar1 is 2-chloro-pyridin-4-yl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl or 2,4-dichlorophenyl.
25. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein Ar1 is cyclohexyl or a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl.
26. A compound or salt according to claim 25, wherein Ar1 is morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl.
27. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein Ar2 is phenyl, pyrrolyl or pyridyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl; and
(ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
28. A compound or salt according to claim 27, wherein Ar2 is substituted with 1 or 2 substituents.
29. A compound or salt according to claim 1, wherein Ar2 is cyclohexyl or a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl; and
(ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
30. A compound or salt according to claim 29, wherein Ar2 is morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl.
31. A compound or salt according to claim 5, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00177
wherein:
R16 is chloro, fluoro or methyl;
R17 is:
(i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl or C1-C4alkanoyl; or
(ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; and
R18 is absent or represents one substituent chosen from chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, or C1-C4haloalkoxy.
32. A compound of the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00178
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 10-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
X is C(R9)(R10), O, N(R2) or SOmN(R2);
Y is C1-C4alkylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with one or two substituents independently chosen from RB;
Z is O(R3), S(O)m(R4), N(R4)(R5), S(O)mN(R4)(R5), C(R6)(R7) or C(R6)(R7)(R8); wherein m is 0, 1 or 2; such that Z is not amino or dimethylamino if X and Y are both —CH2—;
Each RA is independently chosen from:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and —COOH;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C1-C4alkoxy; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
or two RA groups attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms are taken together to form a fused 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RB is:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; such that if RB forms a heterocycloalkyl with R3, then the heterocycloalkyl is not substituted with C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl;
or two RB are taken together to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RD is independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl and aminosulfonyl; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C2-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RE is independently chosen from oxo, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl;
R1 is:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano and amino; or
(iii) taken together with R2 or R9 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
R2 is:
(i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
(iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; or
(iv) taken together with R1, to form an optionally substituted fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle;
R3 is:
(i) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)-C(═O)—, or phenylC0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from halogen, amino, C1-C6alkyl or C1-C6alkoxy; or
(ii) taken together with R2, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R4 is:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, oxo, hydroxy, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, such that R4 is not C1-C8alkyl that is substituted with COOH or C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl;
(iii) taken together with R2, R5, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R5 is:
(i) hydrogen, cyano or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, oxo, hydroxy, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkylC1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycle, and phenyl, such that R5 is not C1-C8alkyl that is substituted with COOH or C1-C8alkoxycarbonyl; or
(iii) taken together with R4 or RB to form an optionally substituted 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
R6 is taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered cycloalkyl or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R7 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE; such that R7 is not C1-C6hydroxyalkyl; or
(iii) taken together with R6 or R8 to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl or heterocycle;
R8 is:
(i) halogen, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5 to 7 membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(iii) taken together with R6 or R7 to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl or heterocycle;
R9 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano or amino;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C8alkylamino, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
(iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form an optionally substituted 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle; or
(iv) taken together with R1 to form an optionally substituted, fused 5- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle; and
R10 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano or amino; or
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, C1-C8alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C8alkylamino, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or C1-C6alkylsulfonyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE.
33. A compound or salt according to claim 32, wherein X is N(R2).
34. A compound or salt according to claim 33, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00179
wherein:
Each n is independently 0, 1 or 2, such that at least one n is not 0;
Q is NR5, O or SOm, wherein m is 0, 1 or 2; and
R11 represents 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from oxo, COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and groups that are taken together with R5 to form a 5- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl; or R11 represents two substituents that are taken together to form a C1-C2alkylene bridge.
35. A compound or salt according to claim 34, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00180
wherein:
R11 represents 0, 1 or 2 substituents independently chosen from oxo, COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl and mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl; and
Q is SO2, SO, S, O or NH.
36. A compound or salt according to claim 34, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00181
wherein R5 is:
(i) hydrogen or cyano; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, C3-C8cycloalkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, or (5- or 6-membered heteroaryl)C0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, oxo, C1-C6alkyl, aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino.
37. A compound or salt according to claim 36, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00182
wherein one of R20 and R21 is taken together with R22 or R23 to form a methylene or ethylene bridge, and those of R20, R21, R22 and R23 that do not form bridge are hydrogen.
38. (canceled)
39. A compound or salt according to claim 33, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00183
wherein:
each n is independently 0, 1 or 2;
R12 is halogen, cyano, amino, C1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C2-C4alkyl ether, C1-C4alkanoyl, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, or (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)C0-C2alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, hydroxy, C1-C4alkoxy, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino; and
R13 represents from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C2-C4alkyl ether and C1-C4alkanoyl; or
R12 and R13 are taken together to form a fused or spiro 5- to 7-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, oxo, C1-C4alkyl and C1-C4hydroxyalkyl.
40. A compound or salt according to claim 33, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00184
41. A compound or salt according to claim 40, wherein R7 is hydrogen or aminocarbonyl and R8 is mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino or C1-C6alkanoylamino.
42. (canceled)
43. A compound or salt according to claim 33, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00185
44. A compound or salt according to claim 33, wherein the compound has the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00186
45-48. (canceled)
49. A compound of the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00187
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 10-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
Ar3 is a 5-membered heteroaryl that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4hydroxyalkyl, C1-C4carboxyalkyl, C2-C4alkyl ether, C1-C4alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl;
Each RA is independently chosen from:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and —COOH;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C1-C4alkoxy; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
or two RA groups attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms are taken together to form a fused 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RE is independently chosen from oxo, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; and
R1 is:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, cyano, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, cyano and amino.
50. A compound or salt according to claim 32, wherein R1 is hydrogen, bromo, chloro, cyano, methyl, ethyl, methylamino or ethylamino.
51. A compound or salt according to claim 32, wherein Ar1 is phenyl or pyridyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl.
52. A compound or salt according to claim 51, wherein Ar1 is pyridin-4-yl that is substituted with 1 or 2 substituents.
53. A compound or salt according to claim 51, wherein Ar1 is substituted with 1 or 2 halogens.
54. A compound or salt according to claim 53, wherein Ar1 is 2-chloro-pyridin-4-yl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl or 2,4-dichlorophenyl.
55. A compound or salt according to claim 32, wherein Ar1 is cyclohexyl or a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl.
56. A compound or salt according to claim 55, wherein Ar1 is morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl.
57. A compound or salt according to claim 32, wherein Ar2 is phenyl, pyrrolyl or pyridyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl; and
(ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
58. A compound or salt according to claim 57, wherein Ar2 is substituted with 1 or 2 substituents.
59. A compound or salt according to claim 57, wherein Ar1 and Ar2 are both 4-fluorophenyl or 4-chlorophenyl.
60. A compound or salt according to claim 32, wherein Ar2 is cyclohexyl or a 6-membered heterocycloalkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 2 substituents independently chosen from:
(i) chloro, bromo, fluoro, cyano, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4haloalkoxy, C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl and C1-C4alkanoyl; and
(ii) C1-C4alkoxy that is unsubstituted or substituted with hydroxy, amino, C1-C4alkoxy, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)amino or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
61. A compound or salt according to claim 60, wherein Ar2 is morpholinyl or thiomorpholinyl.
62. A compound of the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00188
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A is CR1, or N;
Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 10-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is substituted with from 1 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA; such that at least one of Ar1 and Ar2 is substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl;
Ar4 is phenyl or a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocycle, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RA;
such that at least one of Ar1, Ar2 and Ar4 is a heterocycle;
X is O, N(R2) or SOmN(R2);
Each RA is independently chosen from:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and —COOH; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C1-C4alkoxy; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
or two RA groups attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms are taken together to form a fused 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RE is independently chosen from oxo, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl;
R1 is:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with R2 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
R2 is:
(i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C2-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with R1 to form an optionally substituted fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle; and
n is 1, 2 or 3.
63. A compound of the formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00189
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Ar2 is a 5- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
X is O, N(R2) or SOmN(R2);
Y is C1-C4alkylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with one or two substituents independently chosen from RB;
Z is O(R3), S(O)m(R4), N(R4)(R5), S(O)mN(R4)(R5) or C(R6)(R7)(R8); wherein m is 0, 1 or 2;
Each RA is independently chosen from:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and —COOH; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C1-C4alkoxy; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
or two RA groups attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms are taken together to form a fused 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RB is:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(ii) taken together with R3 or R4 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; such that if RB forms a heterocycloalkyl with R3, then the heterocycloalkyl is not substituted with C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl;
Each RD is independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl and aminosulfonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkenyl, C1-C6alkynyl, C3-C8cycloalkylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE; and
(iii) taken together with R5 to form a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Each RE is independently chosen from oxo, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl;
R1 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, amino, halogen, cyano, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl; or
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
R2, if present, is taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R3 is:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C1-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, C1-C6alkyl or C1-C6alkoxy; or
(iii) taken together with R2 or RB to form a 4- to 8-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R4 is:
(i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(iii) taken together with R2, R5, or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R5 is:
(i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, —COOH, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl and phenyl; or
(iii) taken together with R4 or RD to form an optionally substituted 4- to 8-membered heterocycle;
R6 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is optionally substituted, and each of which is preferably substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8, or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R7 and R8 are independently:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
(iii) taken together with R6 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle; or
(iv) R7 and R8 taken together form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle; and
R16 is chloro, fluoro or C1-C3alkyl.
64.-82. (canceled)
83. A compound of the Formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00190
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
A, B and C are independently chosen from nitrogen and CR1, such that exactly one of A, B and C is nitrogen;
Ar1 is a 5- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 1 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
Ar2 is a 5- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA;
Y is C1-C4alkylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with one or two substituents independently chosen from RB;
Z is hydrogen, O(R3), S(O)m(R4), N(R4)(R5), S(O)mN(R4)(R5) or C(R6)(R7)(R8); wherein
m is 0, 1 or 2;
Each RA is independently chosen from:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and —COOH; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C1-C4alkoxy; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
or two RA groups attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms are taken together to form a fused 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RB is:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
or two RB are taken together to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Each RD is independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl and aminosulfonyl; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkenyl, C1-C6alkynyl, C3-C8cycloalkylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RE is independently chosen from oxo, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl;
Each R1 is independently:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylaminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) if located at the A or C position, taken together with R2 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
R2 is:
(i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
(iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; or
(iv) taken together with R1 at the A position to form an optionally substituted fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle;
R3 is:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle)-C(═O)—, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with R2 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R4 is:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R5 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R5 is:
(i) hydrogen, cyano or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from phenyl and RE; or
(iii) taken together with R4 or RD to form an optionally substituted 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl;
R6 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C2-C8alkenyl, C2-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; and
R7 and R8 are independently:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from phenyl and RE; or
(iii) taken together with R6 to form an optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle;
or R7 and R8 are taken together to form a 4- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD.
84.-107. (canceled)
108. A compound of the Formula:
Figure US20070078135A1-20070405-C00191
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:
Ar1 and Ar2 are independently chosen from 5- to 10-membered carbocycles and heterocycles, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RA; such that at least one of Ar1 and Ar2 is an optionally substituted 5- or 6-membered heterocycle;
X is O, N(R2) or SOmN(R2);
Y is C1-C4alkylene that is unsubstituted or substituted with one or two substituents independently chosen from RB;
Z is hydrogen, O(R3), S(O)m(R4), N(R4)(R5), S(O)mN(R4)(R5) or C(R6)(R7)(R8); wherein m is 0, 1 or 2;
Each RA is independently chosen from:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl and —COOH; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C1-C4alkoxy; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
or two RA groups attached to adjacent ring carbon atoms are taken together to form a fused 5- to 7-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RB is:
(i) halogen, hydroxy, —COOH, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4alkyl, C1-C4alkoxy, C1-C4haloalkyl, C1-C4aminoalkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(ii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
or two RB are taken together to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or a 4- to 8-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Each RD is independently chosen from:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, oxo, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl and aminosulfonyl; and
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkenyl, C1-C6alkynyl, C3-C8cycloalkylC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C4alkyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
Each RE is independently chosen from oxo, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl;
R1 is:
(i) hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, amino, nitro, —COOH, aminocarbonyl or aminosulfonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonylC0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl or a (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with R2 or R9 to form a fused 5- to 8-membered carbocycle or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE;
R2 is:
(i) hydrogen or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkyl ether, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C4alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE;
(iii) taken together with R3, R4 or R6 to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; or
(iv) taken together with R1 to form an optionally substituted fused 5- to 8-membered heterocycle;
R3 is:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, C1-C6alkanone, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl) amino carbonyl, (5- to 7-membered heterocycle) —C(═O)—, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (4- to 8-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with R2, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R4 is:
(i) hydrogen;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R5, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RD;
R5 is:
(i) hydrogen, cyano or aminocarbonyl;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, phenylC0-C4alkyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from phenyl and RE; or
(iii) taken together with R4 to form an optionally substituted 4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl;
R6 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl or (5- or 6-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl; each of which is substituted with from 0 to 6 substituents independently chosen from RE; or
(iii) taken together with one or two of R2, R7, R8, R9 or RB to form a 4- to 10-membered cycloalkyl or heterocycle that is substituted with from 0 to 3 substituents independently chosen from RD; and
R7 is:
(i) hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from RE; such that R7 is not C1-C6hydroxyalkyl; or
(iii) taken together with R6 or R8 to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl or heterocycle;
R8 is:
(i) halogen, cyano, amino, aminosulfonyl or —COOH;
(ii) C1-C8alkyl, C1-C8alkenyl, C1-C8alkynyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6alkanoyl, C1-C8alkylthio, C1-C8alkylsulfinyl, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)sulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, each of which is substituted with from 0 to 4 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, —COOH, C1-C6alkyl, C1-C6haloalkyl, C1-C6alkoxy, C1-C6haloalkoxy, C1-C6alkylthio, C1-C6alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C6alkanoyloxy, C3-C6alkanone, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1-C6alkylsulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, and mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; or
(iii) taken together with R6 or R7 to form an optionally substituted cycloalkyl or heterocycle.
109.-131. (canceled)
132. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising at least one compound or salt according to claim 1, in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
133. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 132, wherein the composition is formulated as an indictable fluid, an aerosol, a cream, a gel, a pill, a capsule, a syrup or a transdermal patch.
134. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising:
(i) a first agent that is a compound or salt according to claim 1:
(ii) a second agent that is suitable for treating an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder or bone loss; and
(iii) a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
135. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 134, wherein the second agent is an anti-obesity agent selected from an MCH receptor antagonist, an apo-B/MTP inhibitor, a 11β-hydroxy steroid dehydrogenase-1 inhibitor, peptide YY3-36 or an analog thereof, a MCR-4 agonist, a CCK-A agonist, a monoamine reuptake inhibitor, a sympathomimetic agent, a 3 adrenergic receptor agonist, a dopamine agonist, a melanocyte-stimulating hormone receptor analog, a 5-HT2c receptor agonist, leptin or an analog thereof, a leptin receptor agonist, a galanin antagonist, a lipase inhibitor, a bombesin agonist, a neuropeptide-Y receptor antagonist, a thyromimetic agent, dehydroepiandrosterone or analog thereof, a glucocorticoid receptor antagonist, an orexin receptor antagonist, a glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonist, a ciliary neurotrophic factor, a human agouti-related protein antagonist, a ghrelin receptor antagonist, a histamine 3 receptor antagonist, or a neuromedin U receptor agonist.
136. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 135, wherein the anti-obesity agent is phentermine, orlistat or sibutramine.
137. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 134, wherein the second agent is a nicotine receptor partial agonist, an opioid antagonist or a dopaminergic agent.
138. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 134, wherein the second agent is suitable for treating an addictive disorder, and wherein the agent is selected from methadone, LAAM, naltrexone, ondansetron, sertraline, fluoxetine, diazepam, chlordiazepoxide, varenicline and buproprion.
139. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising:
(a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 132 in a container; and
(b) instructions for using the composition to treat an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, Crohn's disease, depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder, a metabolic disorder or bone loss.
140. A method for treating a condition responsive to CB1 modulation in a patient, in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound or salt according to claim 1.
141. A method according to claim 140, wherein the condition is an appetite disorder, obesity, an addictive disorder, asthma, liver cirrhosis, sepsis, irritable bowel disease, a metabolic disorder or Crohn's disease.
142. A method according to claim 140, wherein the condition is obesity, bulimia, alcohol dependency or nicotine dependency.
143. A method according to claim 142, wherein the condition is obesity.
144. A method according to claim 140, wherein the condition is depression, schizophrenia, a memory disorder, a cognitive disorder, a movement disorder or bone loss.
145. A method for suppressing appetite in a patient, comprising administering to the patient an appetite reducing amount of at least one compound or salt according to claim 1, and thereby suppressing appetite in the patient.
146.-150. (canceled)
US11/406,532 2005-04-18 2006-04-18 Substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists Abandoned US20070078135A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/406,532 US20070078135A1 (en) 2005-04-18 2006-04-18 Substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US67245205P 2005-04-18 2005-04-18
US11/406,532 US20070078135A1 (en) 2005-04-18 2006-04-18 Substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20070078135A1 true US20070078135A1 (en) 2007-04-05

Family

ID=36821488

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/406,532 Abandoned US20070078135A1 (en) 2005-04-18 2006-04-18 Substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (1) US20070078135A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1871762A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2008536950A (en)
AR (1) AR053712A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2006236387A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2606288A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200716594A (en)
WO (1) WO2006113704A2 (en)

Cited By (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070128298A1 (en) * 2005-11-22 2007-06-07 Cowley Michael A Compositions and methods for increasing insulin sensitivity
US20070207985A1 (en) * 2006-03-01 2007-09-06 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Triazine 11-beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 inhibitors
US20070281021A1 (en) * 2006-06-05 2007-12-06 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Sustained release formulation of naltrexone
US20080214592A1 (en) * 2005-11-28 2008-09-04 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of treating anxiety disorders
WO2008141189A1 (en) * 2007-05-09 2008-11-20 Elixir Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Ghrelin modulating compounds and combinations thereof
WO2010025251A2 (en) * 2008-08-27 2010-03-04 University Of Florida Research Foundation, Inc. Materials and methods for modulating appetite, weight gain and adhd using varenicline
US20110059170A1 (en) * 2006-11-09 2011-03-10 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for administering weight loss medications
US20110098289A1 (en) * 2002-05-17 2011-04-28 Gadde Kishore M Method for treating obesity
US20110144145A1 (en) * 2008-05-30 2011-06-16 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating visceral fat conditions
US20110172260A1 (en) * 2010-01-11 2011-07-14 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of providing weight loss therapy in patients with major depression
US8088786B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2012-01-03 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Layered pharmaceutical formulations
WO2014097150A1 (en) 2012-12-17 2014-06-26 Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited Process for the preparation of tofacitinib and intermediates thereof
US9633575B2 (en) 2012-06-06 2017-04-25 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of treating overweight and obesity
US10238647B2 (en) 2003-04-29 2019-03-26 Nalpropion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for affecting weight loss
US10392413B2 (en) 2015-12-18 2019-08-27 Ardelyx, Inc. Substituted 4-phenyl pyridine compounds as non-systemic TGR5 agonists
CN111148735A (en) * 2017-10-04 2020-05-12 日本烟草产业株式会社 Nitrogen-containing heteroaryl compounds and pharmaceutical uses thereof
WO2020210428A1 (en) * 2019-04-09 2020-10-15 Baylor College Of Medicine Novel inhibitors of flavivirus protease for prevention and treatment of zika, dengue and other flavivirus infections

Families Citing this family (92)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI449692B (en) 2005-05-13 2014-08-21 Otsuka Pharma Co Ltd Pyrrolidine compound
US8501739B2 (en) 2005-07-04 2013-08-06 High Point Pharmaceuticals, Llc Medicaments
CA2627358C (en) 2005-11-08 2015-10-06 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Heterocyclic modulators of atp-binding cassette transporters
GB0607196D0 (en) * 2006-04-11 2006-05-17 Prosidion Ltd G-protein coupled receptor agonists
JP5694661B2 (en) 2006-05-29 2015-04-01 ハイ ポイント ファーマシューティカルズ，リミティド ライアビリティ カンパニー 3- (1,3-Benzodioxol-5-yl) -6- (4-cyclopropylpiperazin-1-yl) -pyridazine, its salt, its solvate, and its use as a histamine H3 receptor antagonist Law
CA2666193A1 (en) 2006-08-08 2008-02-14 Sanofi-Aventis Arylaminoaryl-alkyl-substituted imidazolidine-2,4-diones, process for preparing them, medicaments comprising these compounds, and their use
JP5219465B2 (en) * 2006-11-10 2013-06-26 大塚製薬株式会社 Medicine
ES2374952T3 (en) * 2006-12-06 2012-02-23 Glaxosmithkline Llc BICYCLIC COMPOUNDS AND USE AS ANTIDIABETICS.
CN104447716A (en) 2007-05-09 2015-03-25 沃泰克斯药物股份有限公司 Modulators of CFTR
US8653262B2 (en) 2007-05-31 2014-02-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh CCR2 receptor antagonists and uses thereof
EP2014656A3 (en) 2007-06-11 2011-08-24 High Point Pharmaceuticals, LLC New heteocyclic h3 antagonists
KR20100039300A (en) * 2007-08-07 2010-04-15 애보트 게엠베하 운트 콤파니 카게 Quinoline compounds suitable for treating disorders that respond to modulation of the serotonin 5-ht6 receptor
EP2025674A1 (en) 2007-08-15 2009-02-18 sanofi-aventis Substituted tetra hydro naphthalines, method for their manufacture and their use as drugs
FR2922209B1 (en) 2007-10-12 2010-06-11 Sanofi Aventis 5,6-DIARYLES PYRIDINES SUBSTITUTED IN POSITION 2 AND 3, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR USE IN THERAPEUTICS.
LT3170818T (en) 2007-12-07 2020-05-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Solid forms of 3-(6-(1-(2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl) cyclopropanecarboxamido)-3-methylpyridin-2-yl)benzoic acid
MX2010006183A (en) * 2007-12-07 2010-10-15 Vertex Pharma Processes for producing cycloalkylcarboxiamido-pyridine benzoic acids.
AU2009216851B2 (en) 2008-02-22 2013-11-07 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Modulators for amyloid beta
CN106432213A (en) 2008-02-28 2017-02-22 沃泰克斯药物股份有限公司 Heteroaryl derivatives as CFTR modulators
BRPI0908491A2 (en) 2008-02-28 2015-08-11 Nippon Shinyaku Co Ltd Fibrosis inhibitor
EP2310372B1 (en) 2008-07-09 2012-05-23 Sanofi Heterocyclic compounds, processes for their preparation, medicaments comprising these compounds, and the use thereof
BRPI0916657A2 (en) 2008-07-29 2019-03-26 F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag pyrrolidin-3-ylmethyl amine as orexin antagonists
FR2938537B1 (en) * 2008-11-14 2012-10-26 Sanofi Aventis ALKYL-HETEROCYCLE CARBAMATE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THERAPEUTIC USE THEREOF
WO2010068601A1 (en) 2008-12-08 2010-06-17 Sanofi-Aventis A crystalline heteroaromatic fluoroglycoside hydrate, processes for making, methods of use and pharmaceutical compositions thereof
PL2379525T3 (en) 2008-12-19 2016-01-29 Centrexion Therapeutics Corp Cyclic pyrimidin-4-carboxamides as ccr2 receptor antagonists for treatment of inflammation, asthma and copd
EP2470552B1 (en) 2009-08-26 2013-11-13 Sanofi Novel crystalline heteroaromatic fluoroglycoside hydrates, pharmaceuticals comprising these compounds and their use
PT2513093E (en) 2009-12-17 2014-10-22 Boehringer Ingelheim Int New ccr2 receptor antagonists and uses thereof
WO2011093501A1 (en) 2010-02-01 2011-08-04 日本ケミファ株式会社 Gpr119 agonist
HUE028640T2 (en) 2010-02-05 2016-12-28 Heptares Therapeutics Ltd 1,2,4-triazine-4-amine derivatives
US8486967B2 (en) * 2010-02-17 2013-07-16 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Heteroaryl substituted piperidines
NZ708598A (en) 2010-04-07 2017-05-26 Vertex Pharma Pharmaceutical compositions of 3-(6-(1-(2,2-difluorobenzo[d](1,3)dioxol-5-yl) cyclopropanecarboxamido)-3-methylpyridin-2-yl)benzoic acid and administration thereof
EP2569295B1 (en) 2010-05-12 2014-11-19 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH New ccr2 receptor antagonists, method for producing the same, and use thereof as medicaments
EP2569298B1 (en) 2010-05-12 2015-11-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Novel ccr2 receptor antagonists, method for producing the same, and use thereof as medicaments
JP5647339B2 (en) 2010-05-17 2014-12-24 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング CCR2 antagonists and uses thereof
WO2011147772A1 (en) 2010-05-25 2011-12-01 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Ccr2 receptor antagonists
US8962656B2 (en) 2010-06-01 2015-02-24 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh CCR2 antagonists
EP2582709B1 (en) 2010-06-18 2018-01-24 Sanofi Azolopyridin-3-one derivatives as inhibitors of lipases and phospholipases
US9056865B2 (en) * 2010-10-20 2015-06-16 Pfizer Inc. Pyridine-2-derivatives as smoothened receptor modulators
GB201106829D0 (en) 2011-04-21 2011-06-01 Proximagen Ltd Heterocyclic compounds
ES2543050T3 (en) 2011-02-28 2015-08-14 Array Biopharma, Inc. Serine / Threonine Kinase Inhibitors
US8710050B2 (en) 2011-03-08 2014-04-29 Sanofi Di and tri- substituted oxathiazine derivatives, method for the production, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
US8871758B2 (en) 2011-03-08 2014-10-28 Sanofi Tetrasubstituted oxathiazine derivatives, method for producing them, their use as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and the use thereof
WO2012120052A1 (en) 2011-03-08 2012-09-13 Sanofi Oxathiazine derivatives substituted with carbocycles or heterocycles, method for producing same, drugs containing said compounds, and use thereof
EP2683704B1 (en) 2011-03-08 2014-12-17 Sanofi Branched oxathiazine derivatives, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
EP2683705B1 (en) 2011-03-08 2015-04-22 Sanofi Di- and tri-substituted oxathiazine derivates, method for the production thereof, use thereof as medicine and drug containing said derivatives and use thereof
JP5786258B2 (en) 2011-07-15 2015-09-30 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Novel and selective CCR2 antagonist
US9187462B2 (en) 2011-08-04 2015-11-17 Array Biopharma Inc. Substituted quinazolines as serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
GEP20166432B (en) 2011-09-27 2016-02-10 Novartis Ag 3-pyrimidin-4-yl-oxazolidin-2-ones as inhibitors of mutant idh
AR088352A1 (en) * 2011-10-19 2014-05-28 Merck Sharp & Dohme ANTAGONISTS OF THE RECEIVER OF 2-PIRIDILOXI-4-NITRILE OREXINE
UY34632A (en) 2012-02-24 2013-05-31 Novartis Ag OXAZOLIDIN- 2- ONA COMPOUNDS AND USES OF THE SAME
KR102093526B1 (en) 2012-03-01 2020-03-25 어레이 바이오파마 인크. Serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
WO2013158422A1 (en) 2012-04-17 2013-10-24 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Heterocyclic compounds for controlling invertebrate pests
AR090880A1 (en) 2012-04-30 2014-12-10 Janssen R & D Ireland PIRIMIDINE DERIVATIVES
WO2014036015A1 (en) 2012-08-27 2014-03-06 Array Biopharma Inc. Serine/threonine kinase inhibitors for the treatment of hyperproliferative|diseases
US9296733B2 (en) 2012-11-12 2016-03-29 Novartis Ag Oxazolidin-2-one-pyrimidine derivative and use thereof for the treatment of conditions, diseases and disorders dependent upon PI3 kinases
US9624197B2 (en) * 2012-11-27 2017-04-18 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2-pyridylamino-4-nitrile-piperidinyl orexin receptor antagonists
WO2014137883A1 (en) * 2013-03-08 2014-09-12 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. 2-pyridyloxy-4-ether orexin receptor antagonists
WO2014141104A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Novartis Ag 3-pyrimidin-4-yl-oxazolidin-2-ones as inhibitors of mutant idh
US9233953B2 (en) * 2013-10-16 2016-01-12 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Derivatives of 4-(piperazinylcarbonyl)thiane-1, 1-dione which inhibit GlyT1
NZ720958A (en) 2013-11-12 2022-02-25 Vertex Pharma Process of preparing pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of cftr mediated diseases
WO2015090224A1 (en) * 2013-12-20 2015-06-25 中国人民解放军军事医学科学院毒物药物研究所 Novel piperidine carboxamide compound, preparation method, and usage thereof
WO2015123437A1 (en) 2014-02-13 2015-08-20 Incyte Corporation Cyclopropylamines as lsd1 inhibitors
LT3105218T (en) 2014-02-13 2019-12-10 Incyte Corp Cyclopropylamines as lsd1 inhibitors
HUE045725T2 (en) 2014-02-13 2020-01-28 Incyte Corp Cyclopropylamines as lsd1 inhibitors
EP3392244A1 (en) 2014-02-13 2018-10-24 Incyte Corporation Cyclopropylamines as lsd1 inhibitors
WO2016007731A1 (en) 2014-07-10 2016-01-14 Incyte Corporation Imidazopyridines and imidazopyrazines as lsd1 inhibitors
TW201613925A (en) 2014-07-10 2016-04-16 Incyte Corp Imidazopyrazines as LSD1 inhibitors
US9695167B2 (en) 2014-07-10 2017-07-04 Incyte Corporation Substituted triazolo[1,5-a]pyridines and triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazines as LSD1 inhibitors
US9758523B2 (en) 2014-07-10 2017-09-12 Incyte Corporation Triazolopyridines and triazolopyrazines as LSD1 inhibitors
SG11201701683XA (en) 2014-09-05 2017-04-27 Celgene Quanticel Res Inc Inhibitors of lysine specific demethylase-1
JP2017222576A (en) * 2014-10-31 2017-12-21 石原産業株式会社 Pest control agent
PL3221692T3 (en) 2014-11-18 2021-12-06 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Inc. Process of conducting high throughput testing high performance liquid chromatography
MA51438A (en) 2015-04-03 2021-04-14 Incyte Corp HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS USED AS LSD1 INHIBITORS
PT3317270T (en) 2015-07-02 2020-08-24 Centrexion Therapeutics Corp (4-((3r,4r)-3-methoxytetrahydro-pyran-4-ylamino)piperidin-1-yl)(5-methyl-6-(((2r,6s)-6-(p-tolyl)tetrahydro-2h-pyran-2-yl)methylamino)pyrimidin-4yl)methanone citrate
MX2018001706A (en) 2015-08-12 2018-09-06 Incyte Corp Salts of an lsd1 inhibitor.
CN109414410B (en) 2016-04-22 2022-08-12 因赛特公司 Formulations of LSD1inhibitors
CA3030167A1 (en) 2016-07-12 2018-01-18 Revolution Medicines, Inc. 2,5-disubstituted 3-methyl pyrazines and 2,5,6-trisubstituted 3-methyl pyrazines as allosteric shp2 inhibitors
WO2018136264A1 (en) 2017-01-23 2018-07-26 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Pyridine compounds as allosteric shp2 inhibitors
KR20190111079A (en) 2017-01-23 2019-10-01 레볼루션 메디슨즈, 인크. Bicyclic Compounds as Allosteric SHP2 Inhibitors
WO2019028440A1 (en) 2017-08-04 2019-02-07 Skyhawk Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for modulating splicing
WO2019051084A1 (en) 2017-09-07 2019-03-14 Revolution Medicines, Inc. Shp2 inhibitor compositions and methods for treating cancer
BR112020007058A2 (en) 2017-10-12 2020-10-06 Revolution Medicines, Inc. pyridine, pyrazine, and triazine compounds as allosteric shp2 inhibitors
MX2020006273A (en) 2017-12-15 2020-09-14 Revolution Medicines Inc Polycyclic compounds as allosteric shp2 inhibitors.
WO2019212990A1 (en) 2018-05-01 2019-11-07 Revolution Medicines, Inc. C40-, c28-, and c-32-linked rapamycin analogs as mtor inhibitors
WO2020047198A1 (en) 2018-08-31 2020-03-05 Incyte Corporation Salts of an lsd1 inhibitor and processes for preparing the same
JP2022509388A (en) * 2018-10-24 2022-01-20 リードエックスプロ アーゲー Functionalized aminotriazine
WO2020163405A1 (en) 2019-02-05 2020-08-13 Skyhawk Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for modulating splicing
KR20210135507A (en) 2019-02-06 2021-11-15 스카이호크 테라퓨틱스, 인코포레이티드 Methods and compositions for controlling splicing
US11464783B2 (en) 2019-06-06 2022-10-11 Aligos Therapeutics, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds
JOP20220106A1 (en) * 2019-11-12 2023-01-30 Genzyme Corp 6-membered heteroarylaminosulfonamides for treating diseases and conditions mediated by deficient cftr activity
JP2023509310A (en) * 2019-12-18 2023-03-08 クリネティックス ファーマシューティカルズ，インク． GEM-disubstituted piperidine melanocortin subtype-2 receptor (MC2R) antagonists and uses thereof
CN113234031B (en) * 2021-04-06 2023-03-31 暨南大学 D-A type aggregation-induced emission compound and preparation method and application thereof
WO2023191951A1 (en) * 2022-04-01 2023-10-05 The Board Of Regents Of The University Of Texas System Small molecule allosteric modulators of the serotonin (5-ht) 5-ht2c and 5-ht2a receptors

Citations (25)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3162635A (en) * 1962-08-06 1964-12-22 Searle & Co 1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydro-2, 4-pteridinediones and intermediates
US4157392A (en) * 1977-05-17 1979-06-05 Diamond Shamrock Corporation Pharmacologically active substituted 1,2,4-triazines
US4251527A (en) * 1977-05-17 1981-02-17 Diamond Shamrock Corporation Pharmacologically active substituted 1,2,4-triazines
US4310551A (en) * 1979-03-19 1982-01-12 Diamond Shamrock Corporation Pharmacologically active substituted 1,2,4-triazines
US4469696A (en) * 1981-06-24 1984-09-04 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Substituted 2-amino-pyridine derivative compounds, their production and their medicinal use
US4513135A (en) * 1982-03-05 1985-04-23 Eli Lilly And Company Diaryl-pyrazine derivatives affecting GABA binding
US5596008A (en) * 1995-02-10 1997-01-21 G. D. Searle & Co. 3,4-Diaryl substituted pyridines for the treatment of inflammation
US5631255A (en) * 1989-02-07 1997-05-20 Sanofi Pyridazine derivatives
US6174901B1 (en) * 1998-12-18 2001-01-16 Amgen Inc. Substituted pyridine and pyridazine compounds and methods of use
US6350744B1 (en) * 1998-11-20 2002-02-26 Merck & Co., Inc. Compounds having cytokine inhibitory activity
US6410729B1 (en) * 1996-12-05 2002-06-25 Amgen Inc. Substituted pyrimidine compounds and methods of use
US6489344B1 (en) * 1998-06-19 2002-12-03 Chiron Corporation Inhibitors of glycogen synthase kinase 3
US6548503B1 (en) * 1998-11-04 2003-04-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Pyridin-4-yl or pyrimidin-4-yl substituted pyrazines
US6586441B2 (en) * 2000-02-25 2003-07-01 Hoffman-La Roche Inc. Adenosine receptor ligands and their use in the treatment of disease
US6602872B1 (en) * 1999-12-13 2003-08-05 Merck & Co., Inc. Substituted pyridazines having cytokine inhibitory activity
US20030171383A1 (en) * 2000-04-26 2003-09-11 Masahiro Yasuda Medicinal compositions promoting bowel movement
US6664256B1 (en) * 2000-07-10 2003-12-16 Kowa Co., Ltd. Phenylpyridazine compounds and medicines containing the same
US20040082780A1 (en) * 2002-08-08 2004-04-29 Doherty Elizabeth M. Vanilloid receptor ligands and their use in treatments
US20040102436A1 (en) * 2001-04-26 2004-05-27 Tetsuo Asaki Heterocyclic compound derivatives and medicines
US20040259887A1 (en) * 2003-06-18 2004-12-23 Pfizer Inc Cannabinoid receptor ligands and uses thereof
US20050054659A1 (en) * 2003-08-15 2005-03-10 Ellsworth Bruce A. Pyrazine modulators of cannabinoid receptors
US20050182103A1 (en) * 2002-03-28 2005-08-18 Finke Paul E. Substituted 2,3-diphenyl pyridines
US6958353B2 (en) * 2000-06-28 2005-10-25 Hisamitsu Medical Co., Ltd. Imidazole derivatives or salts thereof and drugs containing the derivatives or the salts
US20050245554A1 (en) * 2002-09-27 2005-11-03 Kopka Ihor E Substituted pyrimidines
US6995161B2 (en) * 2000-02-16 2006-02-07 Neurogen Corporation Substituted arylpyrazines

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
SE0104332D0 (en) * 2001-12-19 2001-12-19 Astrazeneca Ab Therapeutic agents
SE0104330D0 (en) * 2001-12-19 2001-12-19 Astrazeneca Ab Therapeutic agents
FR2838438A1 (en) * 2002-04-11 2003-10-17 Sanofi Synthelabo DIPHENYLPYRIDINE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION, THE PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THE SAME
CA2527033A1 (en) * 2003-06-18 2004-12-23 Astrazeneca Ab 2-substitued 5,6-diaryl-pyrazine derivatives as cb1 modulators
GB0314057D0 (en) * 2003-06-18 2003-07-23 Astrazeneca Ab Therapeutic agents
GB0314261D0 (en) * 2003-06-19 2003-07-23 Astrazeneca Ab Therapeutic agents

Patent Citations (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3162635A (en) * 1962-08-06 1964-12-22 Searle & Co 1, 2, 3, 4-tetrahydro-2, 4-pteridinediones and intermediates
US4157392A (en) * 1977-05-17 1979-06-05 Diamond Shamrock Corporation Pharmacologically active substituted 1,2,4-triazines
US4251527A (en) * 1977-05-17 1981-02-17 Diamond Shamrock Corporation Pharmacologically active substituted 1,2,4-triazines
US4310551A (en) * 1979-03-19 1982-01-12 Diamond Shamrock Corporation Pharmacologically active substituted 1,2,4-triazines
US4469696A (en) * 1981-06-24 1984-09-04 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Substituted 2-amino-pyridine derivative compounds, their production and their medicinal use
US4513135A (en) * 1982-03-05 1985-04-23 Eli Lilly And Company Diaryl-pyrazine derivatives affecting GABA binding
US4585861A (en) * 1982-03-05 1986-04-29 Eli Lilly And Company 1,2,4-triazine derivatives
US5631255A (en) * 1989-02-07 1997-05-20 Sanofi Pyridazine derivatives
US5596008A (en) * 1995-02-10 1997-01-21 G. D. Searle & Co. 3,4-Diaryl substituted pyridines for the treatment of inflammation
US6410729B1 (en) * 1996-12-05 2002-06-25 Amgen Inc. Substituted pyrimidine compounds and methods of use
US6610698B2 (en) * 1996-12-05 2003-08-26 Amgen, Inc. Substituted pyrimidine compounds and methods of use
US6489344B1 (en) * 1998-06-19 2002-12-03 Chiron Corporation Inhibitors of glycogen synthase kinase 3
US6548503B1 (en) * 1998-11-04 2003-04-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Pyridin-4-yl or pyrimidin-4-yl substituted pyrazines
US6350744B1 (en) * 1998-11-20 2002-02-26 Merck & Co., Inc. Compounds having cytokine inhibitory activity
US6174901B1 (en) * 1998-12-18 2001-01-16 Amgen Inc. Substituted pyridine and pyridazine compounds and methods of use
US6602872B1 (en) * 1999-12-13 2003-08-05 Merck & Co., Inc. Substituted pyridazines having cytokine inhibitory activity
US6995161B2 (en) * 2000-02-16 2006-02-07 Neurogen Corporation Substituted arylpyrazines
US6586441B2 (en) * 2000-02-25 2003-07-01 Hoffman-La Roche Inc. Adenosine receptor ligands and their use in the treatment of disease
US20030171383A1 (en) * 2000-04-26 2003-09-11 Masahiro Yasuda Medicinal compositions promoting bowel movement
US6958353B2 (en) * 2000-06-28 2005-10-25 Hisamitsu Medical Co., Ltd. Imidazole derivatives or salts thereof and drugs containing the derivatives or the salts
US6664256B1 (en) * 2000-07-10 2003-12-16 Kowa Co., Ltd. Phenylpyridazine compounds and medicines containing the same
US20040102436A1 (en) * 2001-04-26 2004-05-27 Tetsuo Asaki Heterocyclic compound derivatives and medicines
US20050182103A1 (en) * 2002-03-28 2005-08-18 Finke Paul E. Substituted 2,3-diphenyl pyridines
US20040082780A1 (en) * 2002-08-08 2004-04-29 Doherty Elizabeth M. Vanilloid receptor ligands and their use in treatments
US20050245554A1 (en) * 2002-09-27 2005-11-03 Kopka Ihor E Substituted pyrimidines
US20040259887A1 (en) * 2003-06-18 2004-12-23 Pfizer Inc Cannabinoid receptor ligands and uses thereof
US20050054659A1 (en) * 2003-08-15 2005-03-10 Ellsworth Bruce A. Pyrazine modulators of cannabinoid receptors

Cited By (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110098289A1 (en) * 2002-05-17 2011-04-28 Gadde Kishore M Method for treating obesity
US10238647B2 (en) 2003-04-29 2019-03-26 Nalpropion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for affecting weight loss
US8815889B2 (en) 2005-11-22 2014-08-26 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for increasing insulin sensitivity
US9457005B2 (en) 2005-11-22 2016-10-04 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Compositions and methods for increasing insulin sensitivity
US20070128298A1 (en) * 2005-11-22 2007-06-07 Cowley Michael A Compositions and methods for increasing insulin sensitivity
US20080214592A1 (en) * 2005-11-28 2008-09-04 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of treating anxiety disorders
US20070207985A1 (en) * 2006-03-01 2007-09-06 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Triazine 11-beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 inhibitors
US7834178B2 (en) 2006-03-01 2010-11-16 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Triazine 11-beta hydroxysteroid dehydrogenase type 1 inhibitors
US20070281021A1 (en) * 2006-06-05 2007-12-06 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Sustained release formulation of naltrexone
US9107837B2 (en) 2006-06-05 2015-08-18 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Sustained release formulation of naltrexone
US8916195B2 (en) 2006-06-05 2014-12-23 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Sustained release formulation of naltrexone
US20110059170A1 (en) * 2006-11-09 2011-03-10 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for administering weight loss medications
US8088786B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2012-01-03 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Layered pharmaceutical formulations
US8318788B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2012-11-27 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Layered pharmaceutical formulations
US8722085B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2014-05-13 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for administering weight loss medications
US9125868B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2015-09-08 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for administering weight loss medications
WO2008141189A1 (en) * 2007-05-09 2008-11-20 Elixir Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Ghrelin modulating compounds and combinations thereof
US20110144145A1 (en) * 2008-05-30 2011-06-16 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating visceral fat conditions
US11324741B2 (en) 2008-05-30 2022-05-10 Nalpropion Pharmaceuticals Llc Methods for treating visceral fat conditions
WO2010025251A3 (en) * 2008-08-27 2010-06-10 University Of Florida Research Foundation, Inc. Materials and methods for modulating appetite, weight gain and adhd using varenicline
WO2010025251A2 (en) * 2008-08-27 2010-03-04 University Of Florida Research Foundation, Inc. Materials and methods for modulating appetite, weight gain and adhd using varenicline
US9248123B2 (en) 2010-01-11 2016-02-02 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of providing weight loss therapy in patients with major depression
US20110172260A1 (en) * 2010-01-11 2011-07-14 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of providing weight loss therapy in patients with major depression
US10322121B2 (en) 2010-01-11 2019-06-18 Nalpropion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of providing weight loss therapy in patients with major depression
US11033543B2 (en) 2010-01-11 2021-06-15 Nalpropion Pharmaceuticals Llc Methods of providing weight loss therapy in patients with major depression
US9633575B2 (en) 2012-06-06 2017-04-25 Orexigen Therapeutics, Inc. Methods of treating overweight and obesity
US10403170B2 (en) 2012-06-06 2019-09-03 Nalpropion Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating overweight and obesity
WO2014097150A1 (en) 2012-12-17 2014-06-26 Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited Process for the preparation of tofacitinib and intermediates thereof
US9481679B2 (en) 2012-12-17 2016-11-01 Sun Pharmaceutical Industries Limited Process for the preparation of tofacitinib and intermediates thereof
US10392413B2 (en) 2015-12-18 2019-08-27 Ardelyx, Inc. Substituted 4-phenyl pyridine compounds as non-systemic TGR5 agonists
US10968246B2 (en) 2015-12-18 2021-04-06 Ardelyx, Inc. Substituted 4-phenyl pyridine compounds as non-systemic TGR5 agonists
US10752596B2 (en) 2017-10-04 2020-08-25 Japan Tobacco Inc. Nitrogen-containing heteroaryl compound and pharmaceutical use thereof
CN111148735A (en) * 2017-10-04 2020-05-12 日本烟草产业株式会社 Nitrogen-containing heteroaryl compounds and pharmaceutical uses thereof
WO2020210428A1 (en) * 2019-04-09 2020-10-15 Baylor College Of Medicine Novel inhibitors of flavivirus protease for prevention and treatment of zika, dengue and other flavivirus infections

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2008536950A (en) 2008-09-11
WO2006113704A2 (en) 2006-10-26
AU2006236387A1 (en) 2006-10-26
EP1871762A2 (en) 2008-01-02
AR053712A1 (en) 2007-05-16
WO2006113704A3 (en) 2007-02-08
TW200716594A (en) 2007-05-01
CA2606288A1 (en) 2006-10-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20070078135A1 (en) Substituted heteroaryl CB1 antagonists
EP1442024B1 (en) AMINOBENZAMIDE DERIVATIVES AS GLYCOGEN SYNTHASE KINASE 3$g(b) INHIBITORS
US8129395B2 (en) 4,5-disubstituted-2-aryl pyrimidines
US9643970B2 (en) Substituted imidazo [1,5-a]pyrazines as PDE9 inhibitors
US8338591B2 (en) 3-aryl-5,6-disubstituted pyridazines
US20080107608A1 (en) 5-Substituted-2-Arylpyridines
HRP20020747A2 (en) Substituted arylpyrazines
EP1778684B1 (en) 4-PIPERAZINYL-PYRIMIDINE COMPOUNDS SUITABLE FOR TREATING DISORDERS THAT RESPOND TO MODULATION OF THE DOPAMINE D&lt;sb&gt;3&lt;/sb&gt; RECEPTOR
KR20070046924A (en) Substituted biaryl piperazinyl-pyridine analogues
US20070043056A1 (en) 5-Substituted-2-arylpyrazines
JP5559694B2 (en) 1,2,4-Triazine-3,5-dione compounds for treating disorders responsive to modulation of dopamine D3 receptors
US7122546B2 (en) Imidazol-1-ylmethyl pyridazine derivatives

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: NEUROGEN CORPORATION, CONNECTICUT

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:YUAN, JUN;GUO, QIN;ZHAO, HE;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:018456/0833;SIGNING DATES FROM 20060503 TO 20060519

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION